NetSim User Manual

Contents

1 NetSim Introduction ......................................................................... 11

1.1 Introduction to modeling and simulation of networks ............................................................... 11
1.2 Versions of NetSim Academic, Standard & Pro........................................................................ 12
1.3 Components in Pro and Standard versions................................................................................. 14

2 Getting Started in NetSim ................................................................... 16

2.1 Installing NetSim in Client ........................................................................................................... 16
2.2 Setting up License Server ............................................................................................................ 25
2.2.1 Installing NetSim RLM Dongle ....................................................................................... 25
2.2.2 Running RLM Dongle (Server) ....................................................................................... 28
2.2.3 Running NetSim Software ............................................................................................. 29
2.3 Menus in NetSim ......................................................................................................................... 30
2.3.1 Simulation Menu ........................................................................................................... 31
2.3.2 Programming Menu ...................................................................................................... 32
2.3.3 Basics ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.3.4 Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 34
2.3.5 Help ............................................................................................................................... 34
2.4 Modeling and Simulation of a simple network ........................................................................... 35
2.4.1 Creating a Network scenario......................................................................................... 35
2.4.2 Configuring devices and links in the scenario .............................................................. 37
2.4.3 Modeling Traffic ............................................................................................................ 38
2.4.4 Logging Packet/ Event Trace ......................................................................................... 39
2.4.5 Simulation ..................................................................................................................... 39
2.5 Network Opening, Saving, Deleting scenarios and Printing results ......................................... 40
2.5.1 Opening Saved Experiments ......................................................................................... 40
2.5.2 Saving an Experiment.................................................................................................... 43
2.5.3 Deleting Saved Experiments (Only for Legacy networks) ............................................. 44
2.6 Adding and deleting users (Not present in Pro version) ............................................................. 46
2.6.1 Adding New Users ......................................................................................................... 46
2.6.2 Deleting User................................................................................................................. 49

1
3 Simulating different networks in NetSim ............................................ 50
3.1 Internetworks.............................................................................................................................. 50
3.1.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 50
3.1.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 50
3.1.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 51
3.1.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 52
3.1.5 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 52
3.1.6 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 52
3.1.7 IP Addressing in NetSim ................................................................................................ 52
3.1.8 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.11 a, b, g and n ........................................ 53
3.1.9 Features in WLAN 802.11n/ac ...................................................................................... 59
3.2 Legacy Networks ......................................................................................................................... 65
3.2.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 65
3.2.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 65
3.2.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 65
3.2.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................... 66
3.2.5 Enable Packet Trace (Optional) ..................................................................................... 66
3.2.6 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 66
3.3 Advanced wireless networks MANET & Wi-Max ..................................................................... 67
3.3.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 67
3.3.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 67
3.3.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 67
3.3.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................... 68
3.3.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 69
3.3.6 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 69
3.3.7 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 69
3.3.8 Link Layer Acknowledgements and Network Layer Acknowledgements in DSR .......... 70
3.4 BGP .............................................................................................................................................. 72
3.4.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 72
3.4.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 72
3.4.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 72
3.4.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................... 73
3.4.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 73
3.4.6 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 74

2
 3.4.7 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 74
3.5 MPLS............................................................................................................................................ 75
3.5.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 75
3.5.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 75
3.5.3 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................... 75
3.5.4 Enable Packet Trace (Optional) ..................................................................................... 76
3.5.5 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 76
3.6 Cellular Networks GSM/CDMA ................................................................................................ 77
3.6.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 77
3.6.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 77
3.6.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 77
3.6.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 78
3.6.5 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 78
3.6.6 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 79
3.7 Wireless Sensor Network ............................................................................................................ 80
3.7.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 80
3.7.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 80
3.7.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 80
3.7.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 80
3.7.5 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 81
3.7.6 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 81
3.7.7 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.15.4 .......................................................... 81
3.8 Internet of Things ........................................................................................................................ 85
3.8.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 85
3.8.2 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 85
3.8.3 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 86
3.8.4 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 86
3.8.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics(Optional) ................................. 88
3.8.6 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 88
3.8.7 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 88
3.9 Zigbee .......................................................................................................................................... 89
3.9.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 89
3.9.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 89
3.9.3 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................... 89

3
 3.9.4 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 89
3.9.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 90
3.9.6 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 91
3.9.7 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 91
3.9.8 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.15.4 .......................................................... 91
3.10 Cognitive Radio ........................................................................................................................ 95
3.10.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 95
3.10.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 95
3.10.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 95
3.10.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 96
3.10.5 Run Simulation .............................................................................................................. 97
3.10.6 Sample Experiment ....................................................................................................... 97
3.11 LTE ............................................................................................................................................. 98
3.11.1 New Experiment............................................................................................................ 98
3.11.2 Create Scenario ............................................................................................................. 98
3.11.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties ................................................................... 98
3.11.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) ................................ 99
3.11.5 Run Simulation ............................................................................................................ 100
3.11.6 Sample Experiment ..................................................................................................... 100
3.12 Military Radio TDMA link 16 ................................................................................................ 101
3.12.1 New Experiment.......................................................................................................... 101
3.12.2 Create Scenario ........................................................................................................... 101
3.12.3 Set Node Properties .................................................................................................... 101
3.12.4 Set Environment Properties ........................................................................................ 102
3.12.5 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties .................................................................. 103
3.12.6 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional) .............................. 103
3.12.7 Run Simulation ............................................................................................................ 103
3.12.8 Sample Experiment ..................................................................................................... 103

4 Traffic generator in NetSim (Application Models) ............................. 104

4.1 Common properties for all the traffic types ............................................................................. 105
4.2 CBR ............................................................................................................................................ 105
4.3 Custom ...................................................................................................................................... 106
4.4 Voice.......................................................................................................................................... 106

4
 4.5 Video ......................................................................................................................................... 107
4.6 FTP............................................................................................................................................. 110
4.7 Database ................................................................................................................................... 111
4.8 Peer to Peer .............................................................................................................................. 112
4.9 HTTP .......................................................................................................................................... 112
4.10 Email........................................................................................................................................ 113
4.11 Sensor App .............................................................................................................................. 113
4.12 Erlang Call................................................................................................................................ 114
4.13 Emulator.................................................................................................................................. 115
4.14 Priority and QoS of Applications ............................................................................................. 116
4.15 Modelling Poisson arrivals in NetSim...................................................................................... 117

5 Running simulation via CLI ................................................................ 119

5.1 Running NetSim via CLI ............................................................................................................. 119
5.2 Understanding Configuration.xml file ....................................................................................... 124
5.2.1 How to use Visual Studio to edit the Configuration file? ............................................ 125
5.2.2 Sections of Configuration file ...................................................................................... 126
5.2.3 Sample Configuration file............................................................................................ 127

6 Analysis ............................................................................................ 128

6.1 Performance Metrics ................................................................................................................ 128
6.2 Packet Animation ...................................................................................................................... 132
6.3 Dynamic Metrics (only in Standard/Pro Version) ..................................................................... 134
6.4 Analytics Menu (Multiple Experiments) ................................................................................... 135
6.5 Packet Trace (only in Standard/Pro Version) ............................................................................ 137
6.6 Event Trace (only in Standard/Pro Version).............................................................................. 141
6.7 Trace Data Analysis (only in Standard/Pro Version) ................................................................. 144
6.8 Packet Capture & analysis using Wireshark (www.wireshark.com) (only in Standard/Pro
Version) ........................................................................................................................................... 147
6.8.1 Enabling Wireshark in the network scenario .............................................................. 147
6.8.2 Viewing captured packets ........................................................................................... 147
6.8.3 Filtering captured packets........................................................................................... 148
6.8.4 Analyzing packets in Wireshark .................................................................................. 149

7 Custom code in NetSim ..................................................................... 154

5
 7.1 Writing your own code ............................................................................................................. 154
7.1.1 Modifying code ........................................................................................................... 154
7.1.2 Building Dlls ................................................................................................................. 156
7.1.3 Linking Dlls .................................................................................................................. 158
7.1.4 Running Simulation ..................................................................................................... 159
7.2 Implementing your code - Examples ........................................................................................ 160
7.2.1 Hello World Program .................................................................................................. 160
7.2.2 Introducing Node Failure in MANET ........................................................................... 161
7.2.3 Transferring file from source to destination in WSN .................................................. 163
7.3 Debugging your code ................................................................................................................ 168
7.3.1 Via GUI ........................................................................................................................ 168
7.3.2 Via CLI and co-relating with event trace ..................................................................... 171
7.3.3 Viewing & Accessing variables .................................................................................... 177
7.4 NetSim APIs .............................................................................................................................. 185

8 Advanced Features ........................................................................... 187

8.1 Random number Generator and Seed Values .......................................................................... 187
8.2 Static Routing ............................................................................................................................ 188
8.3 File Based Mobility .................................................................................................................... 191
8.4 Interfacing MATLAB with NetSim ............................................................................................. 193
8.4.1 Implement Nakagami Distribution of MATLAB in NetSim without using .m file ........ 193
8.4.2 Debug and understand communication between NetSim and MATLAB.................... 202
8.4.3 Implement Nakagami Distribution of MATLAB in NetSim using .m file: ..................... 206
8.4.4 Plot a histogram in MATLAB using the values generated by Nakagami distribution for
NetSim (using .m file). ................................................................................................................. 208
8.5 Adding Custom Performance Metrics ....................................................................................... 212

9 Programming Exercises ..................................................................... 214

9.1 Architecture .............................................................................................................................. 216
9.2 Creating .exe file for Programming Exercise ............................................................................. 217
9.2.1 Using Visual Studio ...................................................................................................... 217
9.2.2 Using GCC .................................................................................................................... 222
9.2.3 Using Dev C++ ............................................................................................................. 224
9.3 Steps to perform Programming Exercise in NetSim ................................................................. 227
9.4 How to De-bug your code linked to NetSims Programming Exercise ...................................... 228

6
9.5 Programming Exercises ............................................................................................................. 231
9.5.1 Address Resolution Protocol ....................................................................................... 231
9.5.2 Assignment of Sites to Concentrator .......................................................................... 234
9.5.3 Cryptography - Substitution - Encryption ................................................................... 237
9.5.4 Cryptography - Substitution - Decryption ................................................................... 239
9.5.5 Cryptography - Transposition - Encryption ................................................................. 242
9.5.6 Cryptography - Transposition Decryption ................................................................ 243
9.5.7 Cryptography - XOR - Encryption ................................................................................ 246
9.5.8 Cryptography - XOR - Decryption ................................................................................ 247
9.5.9 Cryptography - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Encryption .................................... 250
9.5.10 Cryptography - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Decryption.................................... 253
9.5.11 Rivest-Shamir - Adleman Algorithm (RSA) .................................................................. 258
9.5.12 Cryptography - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Encryption ................................... 260
9.5.13 Cryptography - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) - Decryption ................................... 262
9.5.14 Distance Vector Routing ............................................................................................. 265
9.5.15 Distance Host Configuration Protocol......................................................................... 268
9.5.16 Error Correcting Code - Hamming Code ..................................................................... 271
9.5.17 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) - 12 ...................................... 274
9.5.18 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 16 ..................................... 277
9.5.19 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) - 32 ...................................... 280
9.5.20 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) CCITT ................................ 283
9.5.21 Error Detection Code - Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) .................................. 286
9.5.22 Framing Sequence Bit Stuffing ................................................................................. 288
9.5.23 Framing Sequence Character Stuffing...................................................................... 292
9.5.24 Virtual Scheduling Algorithm ...................................................................................... 295
9.5.25 Address Mask .............................................................................................................. 298
9.5.26 Binary Conversion ....................................................................................................... 300
9.5.27 Classless InterDomain Routing.................................................................................... 304
9.5.28 Network Address......................................................................................................... 308
9.5.29 Special Addresses ........................................................................................................ 310
9.5.30 Subnetting ................................................................................................................... 312
9.5.31 EUI-64 Interface Identifier .......................................................................................... 315
9.5.32 IPV6 Host Addresses ................................................................................................... 318
9.5.33 IPV6 Subnetting........................................................................................................... 321

7
 9.5.34 Leaky Bucket Algorithm .............................................................................................. 325
9.5.35 Multi Level Multi Access ............................................................................................. 328
9.5.36 Code Division Multiple Access .................................................................................... 330
9.5.37 Time Division Multiple Access..................................................................................... 336
9.5.38 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access ........................................................ 340
9.5.39 PC to PC Communication - Socket Programming TCP................................................. 345
9.5.40 PC to PC Communication - Socket Programming UDP ................................................ 350
9.5.41 PC to PC Communication Chat Application TCP ....................................................... 356
9.5.42 PC to PC Communication Chat Application UDP ...................................................... 361
9.5.43 Scheduling - First In First Out (FIFO) ........................................................................... 367
9.5.44 Scheduling - Max - Min Fair (MMF)............................................................................. 370
9.5.45 Shortest Path - Floyds ................................................................................................ 373
9.5.46 Shortest Path - Link State ............................................................................................ 377
9.5.47 Sliding Window Protocol - Go Back N ......................................................................... 380
9.5.48 Sliding Window Protocol - Selective Repeat ............................................................... 385
9.5.49 Sorting Technique - Bubble Sort ................................................................................. 390
9.5.50 Sorting Technique - Insertion Sort .............................................................................. 393
9.5.51 Sorting Technique - Quick Sort ................................................................................... 396
9.5.52 Sorting Technique - Selection Sort .............................................................................. 399
9.5.53 Spanning Tree Borovska ........................................................................................... 402
9.5.54 Spanning Tree Kruskal .............................................................................................. 405
9.5.55 Spanning Tree Prims................................................................................................. 408
9.5.56 Transmission Flow Control - Go Back N ...................................................................... 411
9.5.57 Transmission Flow Control - Selective Repeat ............................................................ 415
9.5.58 Transmission Flow Control - Stop and Wait ................................................................ 419
9.6 Programming exercise - How to practice without NetSim ....................................................... 423

10 NetSim Emulator ............................................................................... 427

10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 427
10.1.1 Emulation: How Simulation interacts with the real world.......................................... 427
10.2 Emulation Set-up: ................................................................................................................... 428
10.2.1 Setting up the NetSim Server: ..................................................................................... 428
10.2.2 Setting up the NetSim Client: ...................................................................................... 429
10.2.3 Setting multiple Virtual Machines (VM) to act as Nodes for Emulation ..................... 431

8
 10.3 Emulation examples in NetSim ............................................................................................... 434
10.3.1 Example Application 1 PING (One way Communication)......................................... 434
10.3.2 Example Application 1 PING (Two way Communication) ........................................ 436
10.3.3 Example Application 2 Video (One way Communication) ....................................... 437
10.3.4 Example Application 3 File Transfer using FileZilla (One way Communication) ...... 442
10.3.5 Example Application 4 Skype (Two way Communication) ........................................ 445
10.3.6 Example Application 5 JPerf Network performance measurement graphical tool
(One way Communication) ......................................................................................................... 447

11 Troubleshooting in NetSim................................................................ 450

11.1 CLI mode ................................................................................................................................. 450
11.1.1 I/O warning displayed in CLI mode: ............................................................................ 450
11.1.2 Connection refused at server<-111> error displayed: ................................................ 451
11.1.3 Unable to load license config dll(126) problem: ......................................................... 451
11.1.4 Error in getting License error in CLI mode: .............................................................. 452
11.1.5 Unable to load license config dll displayed: ................................................................ 453
11.2 Configuration.xml ................................................................................................................... 454
11.2.1 Blue zigzag lines in configuration file attributes: ........................................................ 454
11.2.2 Red zigzag lines in configuration file attributes: ......................................................... 454
11.2.3 Zigzag lines appearing at configuration.xsd in the Configuration file:........................ 455
11.2.4 Simulation terminates and NetSim Backend has stopped working displayed: ....... 456
11.3 GUI .......................................................................................................................................... 457
11.3.1 Readability problem of texts in window: .................................................................... 457
11.3.2 Monitor screen resolution is less than 1024X768: ..................................................... 457
11.4 Licensing .................................................................................................................................. 458
11.4.1 No License for product (-1) error ................................................................................ 458
11.5 Emulator.................................................................................................................................. 459
11.5.1 Server closing connection duration Emulation ........................................................... 459
11.5.2 Emulation closed, yet clients are sending network packets to NetSim Emulation Server
IP Address.................................................................................................................................... 459

12 Known Issues in NetSim v9 ............................................................... 460

12.1 User modified parameters in device properties will not reflect in newly dropped devices .. 460
12.2 Dynamic metrics not updated on modifying scenario ............................................................ 460
12.3 Packet animation in map view does not show node mobility ................................................ 460

9
 12.4 Device properties does not revert to default values .............................................................. 461
12.5 No special characters in file path for Firewall config file ........................................................ 461
12.6 Incumbent ID in network and metrics not matching .............................................................. 461
12.7 BGP link speed issues .............................................................................................................. 461
12.8 Dynamic Metrics limit is 500 graphs ....................................................................................... 461
12.9 Running Application between unconnected nodes ................................................................ 462
12.10 RIP Hop count ....................................................................................................................... 462
12.11 Default gateway cant be empty ........................................................................................... 462
12.12 Simulating ATM scenario multiple times will crash NetSim ................................................. 462
12.13 Packet size limit in TDMA(Military Radio)............................................................................. 462
12.14 Removing link between switches leads to IP addressing issue............................................. 463
12.15 Packet animation simulation time bar is not functioning properly ion WSN, IOT. ............... 463
12.16 In IOT, Power model metrics results are zero....................................................................... 463
12.17 Traditional Ethernet, Frame Relay and X.25 networks crash ............................................... 463

13 NetSim Videos .................................................................................. 464

10
1 NetSim Introduction
1.1 Introduction to modeling and simulation of networks
A network simulator enables users to virtually create a network along with its components
such as devices, links, and applications etc. to study the behavior and performance of the
Network.

Some examples of applications of network simulators are

Protocol performance analysis

Application modeling and analysis
Network design and planning
Research and development of new networking technologies
Test and verification

The key features essential to any network simulation are -

Building the model Create a network scenario with devices, links, applications etc
Running the simulation - Run the discrete event simulation (DES) and log different
performance metrics
Visualizing the simulation- Use a packet animator to view the flow of packets
Analyzing the results - Examine output performance metrics such as throughput,
delay, loss etc. at multiple levels - network, sub network, link, queue, application etc.
Developing your own protocol / algorithm - Extend existing algorithms by
modifying the simulators source C code

11
1.2 Versions of NetSim Academic, Standard & Pro
NetSim is used by people from different areas such as academics, industry and defense to
design, simulate, analyze and verify the performance of different networks.

NetSim comes in three versions- Academic, Standard and Pro. The academic version is
used for lab experimentation and teaching. The standard version is used for project work and
research while Pro version addresses the needs of defense and industry. The standard and pro
versions are available as components in NetSim v9 from which users can choose and
assemble. The academic version is available as a single product and includes all the
technologies shown below. The main differences between the various versions are tabulated
below:

Features Academic Standard Pro

Technology Coverage
Internetworks
Legacy Networks and MPLS Networks
BGP
Advanced Wireless Networks
Cellular Networks
Wireless Sensor Networks
Internet of Things
Zigbee
Cognitive Radio Networks
LTE Networks
Military Radio: TDMA-Link16
Basics
Understand networking concepts using
more than 400 animations
Performance Reporting
Performance metrics available for
Network and Sub-network
Packet Animator
Used to animate the packet flow in
network
Packet Trace and Event Trace
Available in tab ordered .txt format for
easy post processing
Protocol Library Source Codes with
Documentation

Protocol C source codes and appropriate
header files with extensive documentation
Wireshark Interface
Capture NetSim simulation packets using
wire-shark

12
Integrated debugging
Users can write their own code, link their

code to NetSim and debug using Visual
Studio
Dynamic Metrics
Allows users to plot the value of a
parameter over simulation time
Emulator (Add on)
Connect to real hardware running live
application
Target Users and Pricing Educational Educational Commercial

13
1.3 Components in Pro and Standard versions
In NetSim v9, users can choose and assemble components for Pro and Standard version. The
components are as follows:

Component No Networks / Protocols International Standards

Internetworks
Ethernet - Fast & Gigabit
Address Resolution Protocol IEEE 802.3
WLAN - 802.11 a, b, g , n, ac and e RFC 826
Propagation Line of Sight, Log-normal 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac/e
Shadowing, Rayleigh Fading
IP v4 with VPN
Firewalls
Routing - RIP, OSPF
Component 1 Queuing - Round Robin, FIFO, Priority RFC 2453,2328
(Base. TCP, UDP
Required for RFC's 793, 2001 and 768
all Common Modules
components) Applications (Traffic Generator): CBR,
Voice, Video, FTP, Database, HTTP,
Email, Peer-to-peer and Custom
Application encryption AES, DES
Virtual Network Stack
Simulation Kernel
Command Line Interface
Metrics Engine with packet trace, event
trace and dynamic metrics
Packet Animator
Legacy Networks
Aloha - Pure & Slotted
CSMA/CD IEEE 802.3
Token ring IEEE 802.4
Token bus IEEE 802.5
Component 2
ATM ATM Forum
X.25 ITU Forum
Frame Relay IETF RFC 3031
Real Time (Frame Capture)
Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS)

BGP Networks
Component 3
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) IETF RFCs 1771 & 3121

14
 Advanced Wireless Networks IETF RFC 4728, 3561,
Component 4 MANET - DSR, AODV, OLSR, ZRP 3626
Wi-Max IEEE 802.16d

Cellular Networks 3GPP, ETSI, IMT-MC, IS-

Component 5 GSM 95 A/B, IxRTT, 1x-EV-Do,
CDMA 3xRTT

Component 6 Wireless Sensor Networks, Internet of

Things & ZigBee IEEE 802.15.4 MAC ,
(Component 4 WSN with agent model & battery models MANET in L3
required) ZigBee

Cognitive Radio Networks

Component 7 WRAN IEEE 802.22

Long Term Evolution

Component 8 LTE 3GPP

Component 9 Military Radio (Only in PRO Version)

(Component 4 TDMA Link 16 ----
required)

15
2 Getting Started in NetSim
2.1 Installing NetSim in Client
Note: Based on the NetSim version under installation the version type being displayed in the
following windows will change. For example you will see NetSim Standard for a standard
version install

Click on Yes button to install the software.

Setup prepares the installation wizard and

software installation begins with a
Welcome Screen.

Click on the Next button

In the next screen, License agreement will

be displayed.

16
Read the agreement carefully, scroll down to read the complete license agreement. If the
requirement of the license agreement is accepted click I Agree button else quit the setup by
clicking Cancel button.

If you agree with the license agreement, you will be prompted to select the components to be
installed. The list of components is available for selection and assembly only in the Standard
and Pro version. Other versions of NetSim are available as a single package.

Click on the Next button.

Note: Select all the supporting applications

for complete installation of the software.

In the next screen, you will be requested to

enter the installation path

Select the path in which the software needs

to be installed and click on Next button.

Note: In the case of 64 bit machine, ensure

that the path is <OS installed drive>:/Program
Files(x86)/NetSim Standard

In the next screen, you will be requested to

enter the Start menu folder name.

17
Click on the Install button to start the
installation.

The installation process begins.

After the installation of required files, the

installation of supporting software begins.
For NetSim Academic, Adobe Flash
Player will be installed. For NetSim
Standard Version and Pro Version,
gnuplot installation will start by default (if
not deselected during 3rd party software
selection)

The below screen will appear to choose the

language.

After selecting English language, next screen is

as follows

Click on the Next button to install gnuplot

(Supporting Software), License Agreement
screen will appear as shown:

18
Click on I accept the agreement and then
Next icon as shown above.

Click on Next.

In the next screen, you will be requested to enter

the installation path. Select the installation path
and click on Next icon:

19
 In this screen, select Full installation and
components to be installed and select
Next. All the components are required
except Japanese language support:

Set the Start Menu Folder name.

Select Next when the additional tasks

screen appears. No settings are changed:

20
Click Install to continue with the
installation, the following screen appears:

Click on Next.

After completion of the installation of the

software, the Completing gnuplot Setup
Wizard screen will be displayed.

Click on the Finish button to complete the

gnuplot installation.

21
For NetSim Standard Version and Pro Version, Wireshark installation will start by default ( if not
deselected during 3rd party software selection)

Click on Next to start Wireshark installation.

In the following window, click on I Agree.

Click on I Agree.

Select all the components and click on Next.

22
 Click on Next to go to Install Location window
as shown below.

Specify the destination and select Next.

Select Install WinPcap and click on Install.

After the installation of the software, you will

be requested to click Finish to complete the
installation process.

23
Select Run NetSim and then click on the
Finish button.

This completes the installation of NetSim

Software.

Note: During the installation of NetSim Academic version the supporting software installed are
Adobe Flash player and WinPcap.

24
2.2 Setting up License Server
2.2.1 Installing NetSim RLM Dongle

This section guides you to install the RLM Dongle software from the CD-ROM.

Insert the CD-ROM disc in the CD drive.

Double click on My Computer and access the CD Drive
Double click on Driver_Software folder.
Open 32bit_Installer folder or 64bit_Installer folder depending on the system
architecture.
Double click on HASPUserSetup.exe

Each prompt displayed during the process tells you what it is about to do and prompts to
either continue or Exit.

Setup prepares the installation wizard and the software installation begins with a Welcome
Screen.

Click on the Next button

Note: Any other program running during the

installation of the Dongle will affect the
proper installation of the software.

In the next screen, the License agreement is

displayed.

25
 Read the license agreement carefully,
scroll down to read the complete license
agreement. If the requirement of the
license agreement is accepted select the I
accept button else quit the setup by
clicking Cancel button.

Click on the Next button

Click on the Next button. The installation

process begins.

26
After the installation of the software, you will be requested to click Finish button to complete
the installation process.

Now the RLM driver software is installed successfully.

If the driver has been successfully installed then upon connecting the Dongle in the USB port
red light would glow (Refer picture below). If the driver is not correctly installed this light
will not glow when the dongle is connected to the USB port.

27
2.2.2 Running RLM Dongle (Server)

After the Driver Software installation, connect the RLM dongle to the system USB port.

Double click on My Computer and access the CD Drive

Copy the NetSim License Server folder and paste it on Desktop.
Double click on NetSim License Server folder from Desktop.
Double click on rlm.exe

Note: For running NetSim, rlm.exe must be running in the server (license server) system and
the server system IP address must be entered correctly. Without running rlm.exe, NetSim
wont run.

When you run rlm.exe, the screen will appear as shown below.

28
2.2.3 Running NetSim Software

After running rlm.exe, click the NetSim icon in the Desktop.

The screen given below will be obtained.

Enter the Server IP address where the

rlm.exe is running, then click ok button.

You have now reached to the main menu of

NetSim,

29
2.3 Menus in NetSim

In Academic/Standard Version

Opens the Simulation menu consisting of New, Open, Delete and Analytics. User can
simulate Internetworks, Legacy, Cellular, BGP, Advanced Wireless Networks,
Wireless Sensor Networks, Internet of Things, ZigBee Networks, Cognitive Radio
Networks and LTE Networks.

Opens the Programming menu where different

network programming lab exercises are available.

Menu to create users, set passwords, and

sample / exam mode. Switching of users can
be done through the login as option.

Consists of Animated explanations of Displays all the Help related to

networking principles, protocol working NetSim. Help covers Simulation
and packet formats. Experiments also.
NOTE: Present in Academic version
only

In Pro Version

Displays all the Help related to NetSim. Help covers

Simulation Experiments also.

Opens the Simulation menu consisting of New, Open and Analytics. User can simulate
Internetworks, Legacy, Cellular, BGP, Advanced Wireless Networks, Wireless Sensor
Networks, Internet of Things, ZigBee Networks, Cognitive Radio Networks and LTE
Networks.

30
2.3.1 Simulation Menu

The Simulation menu contains options such as New, Open, Delete and Analytics.

2.3.1.1 New
Click on New and select the desired protocol from
Internetworks, Legacy, Cellular, BGP, Personal Area,
Advanced Wireless, Wireless Sensor, Internet of
Things, ZigBee Networks, Cognitive Radio and LTE
Networks to create a new network scenario.

2.3.1.2 Open
To open an already created network scenario (except Legacy Networks), go to Open
Network. For opening Legacy Network scenarios, go to Open Legacy Network.

To open the performance metric window of already

simulated network scenario (except Legacy Networks),
go to Open Metrics. For open the performance metric
window of already simulated Legacy Network scenario,
go to Open Legacy Metrics.

Refer Section 2.3 for detailed understanding.

2.3.1.3 Delete
To delete any Legacy Network scenario, go to Delete.

A. To delete any specific experiment, select Delete, then specify the User Name and
Experiment Name and click Delete.
B. To delete all experiments created by a user, select Delete All and specify the User
Name and click Delete.

Refer Section 2.3 for detailed understanding.

2.3.1.4 Analytics

To compare the metrics of various network scenarios of same network, go to Analytics.

Refer Section 6.4 for detailed understanding.

31
2.3.2 Programming Menu

The Programming menu contains network programming exercises. Click on this menu and
select the desired programming exercise.
Note: This menu is available only in Academic and Standard Version.

Upon selection, the following screen will appear. Please refer Section 9(NetSim
Academic/Standard User Manual) for detailed help.

Using the User mode users can link and run their
own source code.

Clicking on the Concept, Algorithm, Pseudo Code

and Flowchart would open-up for that program.

Clicking on Interface Source Code

will open the .c source files

32
2.3.3 Basics

In this menu, various network concepts are explained using animations. Note: This menu is
available only in Academic Version.

For example: On selecting Ethernet under Internetworks, following screen will be

displayed.

33
2.3.4 Utilities

This menu contains the following options,

Login As - This option is used to log in with another user account. This can be done
based on the access provided.
User Accounts - This option is used to Add or Delete user accounts. Also, password
and mode of the users can be changed. Also experiments can be deleted.

2.3.5 Help

This menu contains all the Help related to NetSim.

NetSim User Manual - It contains the documentation about the working of NetSim.
NetSim Source Code Help It contains the documentation about network protocol source
code (Available with NetSim Standard as well as Pro Version)
NetSim Experiment Manual It contains selected experiments which can be performed in
NetSim.
Shortcut Keys it contains shortcut keys for all menus and sub menus.

34
2.4 Modeling and Simulation of a simple network
This section will demonstrate how to create a basic network scenario and analyze in NetSim.

Let us consider Internetworks. To create a new scenario, go to Simulation New

Internetworks

2.4.1 Creating a Network scenario

Consider we want to design a network with two subnets in Internetworks.

Let us say the subnet 1 consists of two wired nodes connected via a Switch and the other
subnet 2 is a wired node. Both the subnets are connected using a Router. Traffic in Network
is generated from a wired node in subnet 1 to the wired node in subnet 2.

Perform the following steps to create the network scenario which looks like this:

35
Step 1: Drop the devices

Click on Node icon and select Wired Node

Click on the environment (the grid in the center) where you want
the Wired Node to be placed. In this way, place two more wired
nodes.

Similarly to place a Switch and a Router, click on the respective

device and click on the environment at the desired location.

Step 2: Connecting devices on the environment

In order to connect devices present in the environment,

click on Link and select Wired Link.

Click and select the devices successively where link is

required. For example, select wired link and select Switch
and Router successively to connect them. In this manner,
continue to link all devices.

36
2.4.2 Configuring devices and links in the scenario

Step 1: To configure any device, right click on the

device and select properties

User can set values according to requirement. Modify the

properties of any device and click on Accept.

In above scenario, default values already present in the

properties are accepted.

Step 2: To configure the links, right click on any Link and

select Properties.

User can set values

according to requirement.

In above scenario, default

values already present in the
properties are accepted.

37
2.4.3 Modeling Traffic

After the network is configured, user needs to model traffic from Wired Node B to Wired
Node E.

Select the Application Button and click on the gap between the Grid Environment and the
ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.

In above scenario, default values already present in the properties are accepted. The
Source_ID is 2 and Destination_ID is 5. Click on Accept.

38
2.4.4 Logging Packet/ Event Trace

If the user wants to analyze the simulation result using Packet and Event Trace, then they
need to be enabled before simulation.

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5 and 6.6 respectively.

2.4.5 Simulation

For simulating the network scenario created, click on Run

Simulation present in the Ribbon

Set the Simulation Time to 10 seconds. Select OK.

39
2.5 Network Opening, Saving, Deleting scenarios and
Printing results
2.5.1 Opening Saved Experiments
2.5.1.1 Open Network All Networks except Legacy Networks

Go to Simulation Open Network menu to open saved experiments. The following

steps need to be followed:

Open saved experiment folder and select the configuration file you want to open.

2.5.1.2 Open Network Legacy Networks

Go to Simulation Open Legacy Network menu to open saved experiments. The

following steps need to be followed:

Select the User (Note: This option is available in Admin login only)
40
 Select the Network. Only Legacy Networks option will be present.
Select the Protocol(Note: Protocols present under Legacy Network will be displayed)
Select the Experiment
Click on Ok button to open the specified Experiment.

2.5.1.3 Open Metrics All Networks except Legacy Networks

Go to Simulation Open Metrics menu to open saved experiments. The following

steps need to be followed:

Click on Browse and select the Metrics.txt file (present with the saved experiment) you want
to open

41
2.5.1.4 Open Metrics Legacy Networks

Go to Simulation Open Legacy Metrics menu to open saved experiments. The

following steps need to be followed:

Select the User (Note: This option is available in Admin login only)
Select the Network. Only Legacy Networks option will be present.
Select the Protocol(Note: Protocols present under Legacy Network will be displayed)
Select the Experiment
Click on Ok button to open the specified Experiment.

42
2.5.2 Saving an Experiment
2.5.2.1 For all Networks except Legacy Networks

Step 1: After simulation of the

network, on the top left corner
of Performance metrics screen,
click on the Save Network and
Metric as button

Step 2: Specify the Experiment Name and Save Path and click on OK

2.5.2.2 For Legacy Networks

Step 1: After simulation of the

network, on the top left corner
of Performance metrics screen,
click on the Save Network and
Metric as button

Step 2: Specify the Experiment Name and Save Path and click on OK

43
2.5.3 Deleting Saved Experiments (Only for Legacy networks)

In the Simulation menu select Delete option to delete the saved Simulated Experiments.

To delete Experiments the user needs to follow the below given steps,
Click the Delete/Delete All button to enter into the next window.
Delete Click the Delete button to delete single experiment.
Delete All Click the Delete All button to delete all the saved experiments.

In the next window,

Delete Select the Experiment Name that needs to be deleted.
Delete All Select the User Name in order to delete the experiments under
that user.(Note: This option will be available only in Admin login)
Click on Delete button to delete the Experiment(s), else click on Cancel
button to cancel deletion.

44
 After clicking on the Delete button a message appears which says Are you
sure you want to delete this Experiment(s)? Click on Yes to continue
deleting the Experiment(s), else click on No to cancel deleting.
Click on OK button in the The experiment is deleted or The
experiments have been deleted window.

Note:
Admin User: An option called User Name is available only in when the User has
logged into Admin. This option can be made use for deleting experiments under
any User.
Local User: A User who has a normal privilege other than Admin can delete
experiments only which are created by that particular user.

45
2.6 Adding and deleting users (Not present in Pro version)
2.6.1 Adding New Users

This menu can be used to add new user, delete of existing users, and to set mode of working
(Exam/Practice) of the user. It is typically used by professors / administrators to add student
users, and then set the user to exam mode during assessments.

To add new users, go to Utilities Menu User Accounts

The buttons available in User Accounts window are:

Add User - This button is used for creating new users. The following fields have to be
filled in,

o Username - Name of the new user needs to be entered in the field provided.

o Password The password for the user should be provided.

o Category - By default student is selected.

o Mode - Either Practice / Exam mode needs to be selected.

o Click on Accept / Cancel button to accept / cancel the changes.

Delete User - This button is used for deleting the existing users.

Change Password - This button is used to change the password of the user which is
selected currently in the left side of the User Accounts. Administrator can change the
password of all the users, whereas other user (other than Administrator) can change
his/her password only.

Experiment Deletion Section: This section is used to delete the saved experiments in
NetSim. Administrator can delete the saved experiments of all the users, whereas other
user (other than Administrator) can delete his/her saved experiments only.

46
 Note: Experiment Deletion Section can be used to delete the saved experiments in
Legacy Networks and MPLS. Saved experiments in Internetworks, BGP Networks,
Advanced Wireless Networks MANET and Fixed Wi-Max, Wireless Sensor
Networks, Internet of Things, ZigBee Networks, Cellular Networks, LTE Networks
and Cognitive Radio Networks cannot be deleted through Experiment Deletion
Section since these experiments are saved as configuration files in user specified
locations.

Select Admin present inside Add and Delete User panel and then click on Add User

Add User Name and Password, select the Mode of your choice.

There are two modes present in the software,

o Practice Mode - Students will be able to get all the help that is associated with the
software. Saved experiments can be reused. If this mode is selected, then the user
would have access to

1. Under Simulation all the saved experiments in Simulation when the user is
in Practice mode can be opened and reused, deleted if they are not
required and Saved experiment can be used in the Analytics interface.

47
 2. Under Programming Sample all help documents such Concepts,
Algorithm, Pseudo Code and Flowchart can be viewed.

3. Basics Menu,

4. NetSim Help.

o Exam Mode - Students will not be able to use the help associated with the
software. Also saved experiments in the Practice mode cannot be reused in the
Exam mode. If this mode is selected, then the user would have access to,

1. Under Simulation all the saved experiments in Simulation when the user is
in Exam mode can be opened and reused, delete if they are not
required and Saved experiment can be used in the Analytics interface.

2. Under Programming users cannotview Concepts, Algorithm, Pseudo

Code and Flowchart.

3. Basics Menu cannot be accessed,

4. NetSim Help can be used.

Then click Ok.

You can view the newly added user in Add and Delete User panel.

48
2.6.2 Deleting User

In order to delete, you have to be logged in using Admin account. Then select the account
you want to delete and click on Delete User.

49
3 Simulating different networks in
NetSim
3.1 Internetworks
Internetwork simulation is available in NetSim with LAN-WAN-LAN modeling capability.
Internetwork runs Ethernet, Wireless LAN, IP Routing and TCP / UDP and allows users to
log packet and event (in NetSim Standard/Pro version only) traces.

3.1.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu,

Select New Internetworks

3.1.2 Create Scenario

Internetworks come with the palette of

various devices like Switch, Router,
Wired Node, Wireless Node, AP, etc.
Select the desired devices application
icon in the toolbar and click and drop on
the environment.
To remove devices or application, right click on the particular icon and then click Remove.

Select the appropriate link in the toolbar and connect the devices by
clicking on the device 1 and device 2.

50
3.1.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. Routing Protocol in Application Layer of
router and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access
Point and Wireless Node are Global i.e. changing properties in one node will
automatically reflect in the others in that network..

Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

51
3.1.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.1.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.1.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration \Internetworks\Basic Scenario, which the user
can open using NetSim and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that
network and their default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

3.1.7 IP Addressing in NetSim

When you create a network using the GUI, NetSim will automatically configure the IP
address of the devices in the scenario.

Consider the following scenarios:

52
If you create a network with two wired nodes and a switch, the IP addresses are assigned as
10.0.1.2 and 10.0.1.3 for the two wired nodes. The default subnet mask is assigned to be
255.255.0.0. It can be edited to 255.0.0.0 (Class A) or 255.255.255.0 (Class C) subnet masks.
Both the nodes are in the same network (10.0.0.0).

Similarly, if you create a network with a router and two wired nodes, the IP addressed are
assigned as 11.1.1.2 and 11.2.1.2 for the two wired nodes. The subnet mask is default as in
above case, i.e., 255.255.0.0. The IP address of the router is 11.1.1.1 and 11.2.1.1
respectively for the two interfaces. Both the nodes are in different networks (11.1.0.0 and
11.2.0.0) in this case.

The same logic is extended as the number of devices is increased.

3.1.8 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.11 a, b, g and n

3.1.8.1 Received Power Calculation

The received power can be expressed as

[Prec]dbm = 10log10 (Pt) + [GT] + [GR] + 20log10 (/4d0) + 10log (d0/d) + Pshadow loss + Pfading

Where Pt = Power Transmitted (in mwatts)

GT=Gain of the transmitting antenna (in dB)
GR=Gain of the receiving antenna (in dB)
= Wavelength (in meters)
d0= Reference distance (at which the path loss inherits free space path loss)
= Path loss exponent (ranges between 2 to 5)
Pshadow loss = Power due to Shadowing (in dB)
Pfading = Power due to Fading (in dB)

The code for calculating the received power is included in the file 802_11_PHY.c, path for
the file is NetSim Standard\src\Simulation\WLAN.

53
3.1.8.2 Propagation Loss

Three different and mutually independent propagation phenomena influence the power of the
received signal: path loss, shadowing and multipath fading.

3.1.8.2.1 Path Loss

Path loss is the reduction in power density of an electromagnetic wave as it propagates

through space. Path loss may be due to many effects, such as free reflection, aperture-
medium coupling loss, and absorption.
Path loss can be represented by the path loss exponent, whose value is normally in the range
of 2 to 4, where 2 is for propagation in free space.
In NetSim, the default value for path loss exponent is taken as 2.
Path loss is usually expressed in dB. In its simplest form, the path loss can be calculated
using the formula
L=10log (d0/d)

Where L is the path loss in decibels, is the path loss exponent and d is the distance between
transmitter and the receiver, usually measured in meters.
A simplified formula for the path loss between two isotropic antennas in free space:
L (in dBm) = 20log10 (4d0/)
Where L is the path loss in decibels, _ is the wavelength and d is the transmitter-receiver
distance in the same units as the wavelength.

The code for calculating the Path loss is included in the function
fn_NetSim_WLAN_CalculateReceivedPower, which is present in the file 802_11_PHY.c,
path for the file is NetSim Standard\src\Simulation\WLAN.

3.1.8.2.2 Shadowing

Slow shadowing in wireless network is the attenuation caused by buildings or any obstacles
between a transmitter and a receiver. In the model with shadowing, the shadowing value X
typically defined in dB, is added to (or subtracted from) the average received power zero
means Gaussian distributed random variable with standard deviation. The default value for
standard deviation is chosen as 5 dB.
The code for calculating the shadow loss is present in file 802_11_PHY.c, path for the file is
NetSim Standard\src\Simulation\WLAN.
54
3.1.8.2.3 Fading

In wireless communications, fading is deviation of the attenuation affecting a signal over

certain propagation media. The fading may vary with time, geographical position or radio
frequency, and is often modelled as a random process.
In NetSim, the Rayleigh Fading, which follows Rayleigh Probability Distribution with mean
of 1, is used. The code for calculating fading loss is present in the file 802_11_PHY.c, path
for the file is NetSim Standard\src\Simulation\WLAN.

3.1.8.3 SINR Calculation

Analogous to the SNR used often in wired communications systems, the SINR is defined as
the power of a certain signal of interest divided by the sum of the interference power (from
all the other interfering signals) and the power of some background noise.

The interference power is the difference between the total power received by the receiver and
the power received from one particular transmitter.

The background thermal noise in dBm at room temperature is given by:

PNoise (in dBm) = -174+10log10 (f)

Where f is the Bandwidth in Hertz. For 802.11a, b, g, f = 20 MHz, and for 802.11n, f =
20 MHz or 40 MHz.

Therefore, SNR (in dBm) = Power Received (in dBm) - PNoise (in dBm)

3.1.8.4 Bit Error Rate (BER) Calculation

The bit error rate (BER) is the number of bit errors divided by the total number of transferred
bits during a studied time interval. The BER calculation has been done as a hash-table based
on the BER curves for different modulation schemes.

The code for calculating SNR and implementation of SNR vs. BER is included in the
function fn_NetSim_WLAN_802_11x_BER of the file 802_11_x.c (where x=a, b, g and n),
you can find it in the following path NetSim Standard\src\Simulation\WLAN.

55
 SNR vs. BER curve for MPSK (where M=2k)

(Reference: From Page 221 Digital Communications by Bernard Sklar 2nd Edition)

56
SNR vs. BER curve for 5.5CCK and 11CCK

0
Bit Error Rate
10

10 -1

-2
10
5.5CCK
BER

-3
10
TextEnd 11CCK

10 -4

-5
10

-6
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Eb/No

(Reference: Higher Rate 802.11b: Double the Data Rate Chris Heegard, Matthew Shoemake & Sid
Schrum Doc: IEEE 802.11-00/091)

SNR vs. BER curve for MQAM

(Reference: BER Comparison of M-ary QAM by Mukthar Hussain MATLAB File Exchange)

57
3.1.8.5 SNR vs. BER Table followed in NetSim

SNR(in BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 5.5 CCK 11 CCK

dB)
0 to 0.5 7.00E-02 2.50E-01 1.50E-01 1.75E-01 4.50E-01 5.50E-01
0.5 to 1 6.00E-02 2.45E-01 1.35E-01 1.70E-01 4.50E-01 5.50E-01
1 to 1.5 5.00E-02 2.40E-01 1.15E-01 1.65E-01 1.75E-01 2.75E-01
1.5 to 2 4.00E-02 2.35E-01 1.00E-01 1.60E-01 1.75E-01 2.75E-01
2 to 2.5 2.50E-02 2.25E-01 9.50E-02 1.50E-01 9.50E-02 1.50E-01
2.5 to 3 1.50E-02 2.15E-01 9.00E-02 1.40E-01 9.50E-02 1.50E-01
3 to 3.5 1.00E-02 2.05E-01 8.00E-02 1.30E-01 4.50E-02 8.50E-02
3.5 to 4 9.50E-03 1.95E-01 7.00E-02 1.20E-01 4.50E-02 8.50E-02
4 to 4.5 9.00E-03 1.85E-01 6.00E-02 1.10E-01 9.50E-03 3.50E-02
4.5 to 5 7.00E-03 1.75E-01 5.00E-02 1.00E-01 9.50E-03 3.50E-02
5 to 5.5 5.00E-03 1.65E-01 4.00E-02 9.80E-02 6.00E-03 6.00E-03
5.5 to 6 2.50E-03 1.55E-01 3.00E-02 9.20E-02 6.00E-03 6.00E-03
6 to 6.5 1.50E-03 1.45E-01 2.00E-02 8.40E-02 1.50E-03 1.50E-03
6.5 to 7 8.50E-04 1.35E-01 1.00E-02 7.60E-02 1.50E-03 1.50E-03
7 to 7.5 7.00E-04 1.25E-01 9.50E-03 6.80E-02 6.00E-04 6.50E-04
7.5 to 8 2.00E-04 1.15E-01 8.00E-03 6.00E-02 6.00E-04 6.50E-04
8 to 8.5 9.00E-05 9.50E-01 6.50E-03 5.00E-02 7.00E-05 9.50E-05
8.5 to 9 6.00E-05 8.75E-02 5.00E-03 4.00E-02 7.00E-05 9.50E-05
9 to 9.5 3.00E-05 7.50E-02 3.50E-03 3.00E-02 7.00E-06 1.50E-06
9.5 to 10 1.50E-05 6.50E-02 2.00E-03 2.50E-02 7.00E-06 1.50E-06
10 to 11 1.00E-06 5.00E-02 1.00E-03 9.50E-03 8.00E-07 1.50E-07
11 to 12 1.00E-07 2.50E-02 7.00E-04 6.50E-03 9.50E-08 5.50E-08
12 to 13 1.00E-08 1.50E-02 3.00E-04 3.50E-03 2.50E-09 9.50E-09
13 to 14 1.00E-09 9.50E-03 1.00E-05 9.50E-04 1.00E-10 1.00E-10
14 to 15 1.00E-09 7.00E-03 1.00E-06 7.00E-04 1.00E-10 1.00E-10
15 to 16 1.00E-09 2.00E-03 1.00E-07 3.50E-04 1.00E-10 1.00E-10
16 to 17 1.00E-09 1.00E-06 1.00E-07 1.00E-05 1.00E-10 1.00E-10

58
3.1.9 Features in WLAN 802.11n/ac
3.1.9.1 IEEE 802.11n Standard

Mac aggregation and block acknowledgement are two important enhancements to 802.11n
standard. In the aggregation scheme, several MPDUs (MAC Protocol Data Units) are
aggregated in to a single A-MPDU (Aggregated MPDU).

The A-MPDUs are created before sending to PHY layer for transmission. The MAC does
not wait for MPDUs before aggregation. It aggregates the already present packets in the
queue to form an A-MPDU. The maximum size of A-MPDU is 65535 bytes. The maximum
size of each MPDU is 4KB. In A-MPDU, each MPDU has a delimiter of 32bits at the
beginning and padding ate the end. These padding bytes ensure that size of MPDU is a
multiple of 4bytes.

In 802.11n, a single block acknowledgement is sent for the entire A-MPDU. The block ack
acknowledges each packet that is received. It consists of a bitmap(compressed bitmap) of
64bits or 8 bytes. This bitmap can acknowledge upto 64 packets, 1bit for each packet. The
value of a bitmap field is 1 if respective packet is received without error else it is 0. Only the
error packets are resent until a retry limit is reached. The number of packets in an A-MPDU
is restricted to 64 since the size of block ack bitmap is 64bits.

Block Ack Control Packet

59
3.1.9.2 Details of 802.11 n implementation in NetSim

NetSim aggregates packets in terms of numbers and not size.

A user can vary the number of packets to aggregate by changing the appropriate
parameters in the GUI.
NetSim ignores the padding bytes added to the MPDU since its effect is negligible.
NetSim aggregates packets to the same receiver id and not to the destination ID.

Packets arriving from the NETWORK Layer gets queued up in an access buffer from which
they are sorted according to their priority in the respective QOS buffer according to the IEEE
802.11e standard. An event MAC_OUT with SubEvent CS (Carrier Sense CSMA) is
added to check if the medium is free

In CS, if the medium is free, then the NAV is checked. This is enabled if RTS/CTS
mechanism is enabled which can be done so by adjusting the RTS Threshold. If the

60
Present_Time>NAV, then an Event MAC_OUT with SubEvent DIFS End is added at the
time Present_Time + DIFS time.

The medium is checked at the end of DIFS time period and a random time BackOff is
calculated based on the Contention Window (CW). An Event MAC_OUT with SubEvent
Backoff is added at time Present_Time + BackOff Time.

Once Backoff is successful, NetSimstarts the transmission process wherein it gets the
aggregated packet from the QOS buffer and stores it in the Retransmit buffer. If the A-MPDU
size is > RTS Threshold, then it enables RTS/CTS mechanism which is an optional feature.

NetSim sends the packet by calling the PHY_OUT Event with SubEventAMPDU_Frame.
Note that the implementation of A-MPDU is in the form of a linked list.

61
 Whenever a packet is transmitted, the medium is made busy and a Timer Event with
SubEvent Update Device Status is added at the transmission end time to set the medium again
as idle.

Events PHY_OUT SubEvent AMPDU_SubFrame, Timer EventSubEvent Update Device

Status and Event PHY_IN SubEvent AMPDU_SubFrame are added in succession for each
MPDU (Subframe of the aggregated packet). This is done for collision calculations. If two
stations start transmission simultaneously, then some of the SubFrames may collide. Only
those collided SubFrames will be retransmitted again. The same logic is followed for an
Errored packet. However, if the PHY header (the first packet) is errored or collided, the entire
A-MPDU is resent.

At the receiver, the device de-aggregates the packet in the MAC Layer and generates a
block ACK which is sent to the transmitter. If the receiver is an intermediate node, the de-
aggregated packets are added to the access buffer of the receiver in addition to the packets
which arrive from Network layer. If the receiver is the destination, then the received packets
are sent to the Network layer. At the transmitter side, when the device receives the block
acknowledgement, it retransmits only those packets which are errored. The rest of the packets
are deleted from the retransmit buffer. This is done till all packets are transmitted successfully
or a retransmit limit is reached after which next set of packets are aggregated to be sent.

3.1.9.3 802.11ac MAC and PHY Layer Implementation

Improvements in 802.11ac compared to 802.11n

Feature 802.11n 802.11ac

Spatial Streams Up to 4 streams Up to 8 streams

MIMO Single User MIMO Multi-User MIMO
Channel
20 and 40 MHz 20, 40, 80 and 160 MHz (optional)
Bandwidth
BPSK, QPSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
Modulation
16QAM and 64QAM and 256QAM (optional)
Max Aggregated
65536 octets 1048576 octets
Packet Size

62
MAC layer improvements include only the increment of number of aggregated packets from
64 to 1024. The MCS index for different modulation and coding rates

MCS Index Modulation Code Rate

0 BPSK 1/2
1 QPSK 1/2
2 QPSK 3/4
3 16QAM 1/2
4 16QAM 3/4
5 64QAM 2/3
6 64QAM 3/4
7 64QAM 5/6
8 256QAM 3/4
9 256QAM 5/6

Receiver sensitivity for different modulation schemes in 802.11ac (for a 20MHz Channel
bandwidth)

MCS Index Receiver Sensitivity (in dBm)

0 -82
1 -79
2 -77
3 -74
4 -70
5 -66
6 -65
7 -64
8 -59
9 -57

63
Number of subcarriers for different channel bandwidths

Capacity relative to
PHY Standard Subcarriers
20MHz in 802.11ac

802.11n/802.11ac 20MHz Total 56, 52 Usable (4 pilot) x1.0

802.11n/802.11ac 40MHz Total 114, 108 Usable (6 pilot) x2.1
802.11n/802.11ac 80MHz Total 242, 234 Usable (8 pilot) x4.5
802.11n/802.11ac 160MHz Total 484, 468 Usable (16 pilot) x9.0

Now with the knowledge of MCS index and bandwidth of the channel data rate is set in the
following manner

Step1: Get the number subcarriers that are usable for the given bandwidth of the medium.

Step2: Get the Number of Bits per Sub Carrier (NBPSC) from selected MCS

Step3: Number of Coded Bits Per Symbol (NCBPS) = NBPSC*Number of Subcarriers

Step4: Number of Data Bits Per Symbol (NDBPS) = NCBPS*Coding Rate

Step5: Physical level Data Rate = NDBPS/Symbol Time (4micro sec for long GI and 3.6
micro sec for short GI)

64
3.2 Legacy Networks
3.2.1 New Experiment
In the Simulation menu select New
Legacy Networks
For example, to arrive Pure Aloha,
In the Simulation menu select New
Legacy Networks Pure Aloha.

3.2.2 Create Scenario

Adding Node:
Click on the Node icon in the tool bar and click and drop inside the grid. (Note: This is
applicable for Pure Aloha and Slotted Aloha)
Nodes cannot be connected directly to each other because an intermediate connecting
component (such as Hub or Concentrator) is required. (Note: This is applicable for
Traditional Ethernet, Token Bus and Token Ring)

Adding Hub:
Click on the Hub icon in the tool bar and click it onto the environment. By default a Hub
has eight ports. (Note: This is applicable for Traditional Ethernet and Token Bus)

Adding Concentrator:
Click on the Concentrator icon in the tool bar and click it onto the environment. By
default a Concentrator consists of eight ports. (Note: This is applicable for Token Ring)

Adding CPE (Customer Premise Equipment):

Click on the CPE icon in the tool bar, click and drop the CPE on the environment. (Note:
This is applicable for ATM, X.25 and Frame Relay)

3.2.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

The steps for connecting CPE and Switch are as follows,

The connections between two CPEs cannot be made in the network.
The connection possibilities are,
CPE to Switch and

65
 Switch to Switch.
(Note: Depending upon the simulation, choose either ATM Switch or X.25 Switch or Frame
Relay Switch)
Set Node Properties or CPE Properties

Right Click on the appropriate node or CPE and select Properties

Set the Properties for the devices and links

Right click over the devices and then select Properties to set the properties of the links and
the devices

3.2.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties

On opening an already configured properties of an application the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

This View button is enabled once the Accept Button is clicked. To view the given values,
click on the View button.

3.2.5 Enable Packet Trace (Optional)

Click Packet Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the required
attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5respectively. Select Dynamic Metrics
icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.2.6 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

66
3.3 Advanced wireless networks MANET & Wi-Max
3.3.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select New

Advanced Wireless Networks
For example, to arrive MANET,
In the Simulation menu select New
Advanced Wireless Networks
MANET

3.3.2 Create Scenario

Adding Wireless Node (Note: This is applicable for MANET)
Click on the Node icon in the tool bar, select Wireless Node and click
and drop it inside the grid. One must be aware that TCP is disabled by
default. (Note: A Node cannot be placed on another Node. A Node
cannot float outside of the grid.)

Adding Base Station and Subscriber (Note: This is applicable for Wi-
MAX)
Click on the Base Station icon in the tool bar and click it onto the
environment.
Click on the Wi-Max Subscriber icon after clicking Node icon in the
tool bar. Click and drop it onto the environment.

3.3.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

For MANET and Wi-Max

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements.
o In case of Wi-Max, Routing Protocol in Application Layer of router and all user
editable properties in DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access Point and
Wireless Node are Global i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically
reflect in the others in that network.

67
 o In case of MANET, in Wireless Node, Routing Protocol in Network Layer and all
user editable properties in DataLink Layer, Physical Layer and Power are Global
i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that
network.

Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.3.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties

On opening an already configured properties of environment, the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

68
3.3.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.3.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ MANET\ <Protocol>, which the user can open
using NetSim and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network
and their default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

3.3.7 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

Note on MANET implementation in NetSim:

If user wants to implement HTTP application among Nodes, TCP must be enabled in
Source Node as TCP is set to disable by default.

69
 OLSR is a proactive link-state routing protocol, which uses hello and topology control
(TC) messages to discover and then disseminate link state information throughout the
mobile ad hoc network. Individual nodes use this topology information to compute
next hop destinations for all nodes in the network using shortest hop forwarding paths.
For topology control (TC) messages to disseminate throughout, it requires 5 or more
seconds depending upon the network size. In general, it is (5.5 secs + Tx_Time *
network size). Hence an application must start at least 6-7 seconds after the network
commences and it can be done by setting the Starting time parameter in
Application.

3.3.8 Link Layer Acknowledgements and Network Layer

Acknowledgements in DSR

Route Maintenance is the mechanism by which a source node S is able to detect, while
using a source route to some destination node D, if the network topology has changed such
that it can no longer use its route to D because a link along the route no longer works.

Using Link-Layer Acknowledgements

If the MAC protocol in use provides feedback as to the successful delivery of a data packet
(such as is provided for unicast packets by the link-layer acknowledgement frame defined by
IEEE 802.11), then the use of the DSR Acknowledgement Request and Acknowledgement
options is not necessary. If such link-layer feedback is available, it SHOULD be used instead
of any other acknowledgement mechanism for Route Maintenance, and the node SHOULD
NOT use either passive acknowledgements or network-layer acknowledgements for Route
Maintenance.

When using link-layer acknowledgements for Route Maintenance, the retransmission

timing and the timing at which retransmission attempts are scheduled are generally controlled
by the particular link layer implementation in use in the network. For example, in IEEE
802.11, the link-layer acknowledgement is returned after a unicast packet as a part of the
basic access method of the IEEE 802.11 Distributed Coordination Function (DCF) MAC

70
protocol; the time at which the acknowledgement is expected to arrive and the time at which
the next retransmission attempt (if necessary) will occur are controlled by the MAC protocol
implementation.

Using Network-Layer Acknowledgements

When a node originates or forwards a packet and has no other mechanism of

acknowledgement available to determine reachability of the next-hop node in the source route
for Route Maintenance, that node SHOULD request a network-layer acknowledgement from
that next- hop node. To do so, the node inserts an Acknowledgement Request option in the
DSR Options header in the packet. The Identification field in that Acknowledgement
Request option MUST be set to a value unique over all packets recently transmitted by this
node to the same next-hop node.

When using network-layer acknowledgements for Route Maintenance, a node SHOULD

use an adaptive algorithm in determining the retransmission timeout for each transmission
attempt of an acknowledgement request. For example, a node SHOULD maintain a separate
round-trip time (RTT) estimate for each node to which it has recently attempted to transmit
packets, and it SHOULD use this RTT estimate in setting the timeout for each retransmission
attempt for Route Maintenance.

71
3.4 BGP
3.4.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select Simulation New

BGP Networks

3.4.2 Create Scenario

Adding Border Router:

Click and drop the Border Router icon from the tool bar. (Note: Maximum you can
have 3 Autonomous systems in a single scenario.)

Adding Internal Router:

Click on the Internal Router icon in the tool bar and drop the Internal Router onto the
Autonomous systems created. By default a Router has eight ports.

Establishing Connections
The steps for connecting devices in BGP networks are as follows,
The connections between two wired nodes cannot be made in the network.
The connection possibilities are
Wired Node to Internal Router
Internal Router to Border Router
Border Router to Border Router

3.4.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. Routing Protocol in Application Layer of
router and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access
Point and Wireless Node are Global i.e. changing properties in one node will
automatically reflect in the others in that network.

72
 Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.4.4 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties

On opening an already configured properties of an application the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

This View button is enabled once the Accept Button is clicked. To view the given values,
click on the View button.

3.4.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

73
3.4.6 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.4.7 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ BGP, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

74
3.5 MPLS
3.5.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select Simulation

New Legacy Networks MPLS
Networks

3.5.2 Create Scenario

Adding CPE - Click on the CPE icon in the toolbar and drop the CPE on the environment.

Adding Router - Click on the Router icon in the tool bar, click and drop the Router on the
environment. By default a Router has eight ports.

Establishing Connections
The steps for connecting CPE and Router are as follows:

The connections between two CPEs cannot be made in the network.

The connection possibilities are
CPE to Router and
Router to Router.
Set the Properties for the devices and links
Right click over the devices and then select Properties to set the properties of the links and
the devices

3.5.3 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties

On opening an already configured properties of an application the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

This View button is enabled once the Accept Button is clicked. To view the given values,
click on the View button.

75
3.5.4 Enable Packet Trace (Optional)

Click Packet Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the required
attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5 respectively. Select Dynamic Metrics
icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.5.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

76
3.6 Cellular Networks GSM/CDMA
3.6.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select New

Cellular Networks
For Example, to arrive CDMA
In the Simulation menu select New
Cellular Networks CDMA

3.6.2 Create Scenario

Adding Base Transceiver Station (BTS) - Click on the BTS icon in the toolbar and click it
onto the environment.
Adding Mobile Switching Centre (MSC) - Click and drop MSC in the environment.
Adding Mobile Station (MS) -
Click on the Mobile Station icon in the tool bar, click and drop it on the Base Station
coverage area.
Mobile Station cannot be placed on another Mobile Station. It has to be clicked and
placed on the Base Station coverage area.

3.6.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements.

Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

77
3.6.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.6.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

78
3.6.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ Cellular\ <Cellular Technology>, which the
user can open using NetSim and understand how devices are connected among themselves
for that network and their default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

79
3.7 Wireless Sensor Network
3.7.1 New Experiment
In the Simulation menu select Simulation
New Wireless Sensor Networks

3.7.2 Create Scenario

Adding Sink Node- Click on the Sink Node icon in the toolbar and click and drop inside the
grid.
Adding Sensor - Click on the Sensor Node icon in the toolbar and click and drop inside the
grid.
Adding Agent- Click on the Agent icon in the toolbar and click and drop inside the grid.

3.7.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. In Sensor Node, Routing Protocol in Network
Layer and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer, Physical Layer and Power are
Global i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that
network.
Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.7.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

80
3.7.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.7.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\WSN, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

3.7.7 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.15.4

SINR Calculation:

Analogous to the SNR used often in wired communications systems, the SINR is defined as
the power of a certain signal of interest divided by the sum of the interferencepower (from all
the other interfering signals) and the power of some background noise.
The interference power is the difference between the total power received by the receiver and
the power received from one particular transmitter.

The background thermal noise in dBm at room temperature is given by:

P (in dBm) =

where f is the Bandwidth in Hertz. For 802.15.4, f = 2 MHz

( )
P (in mW) =

81
Therefore, SINR in dBm is calculated as:

SINR (in dBm) = ( )

Bit Error Rate (BER) Calculation:

The bit error rate (BER) is the number of bit errors divided by the total number of transferred
bits during a studied time interval. The BER results were obtained using the analytical model
from IEEE standard 802.15.2-2003 [B9]. The calculation follows the approach outlined in
5.3.2 of that standard.

( ( ))
BER = ( ) ( ) ( )

Where SINR = Signal-to-Interference-plus-Noise Ratio. BER should be between 0 and 1.

Propagation Loss:

Three different and mutually independent propagation phenomena influence the power of the
received signal: path loss, shadowing and multipath fading.

Shadowing:

Slow shadowing in wireless network is the attenuation caused by buildings or any obstacles
between a transmitter and a receiver. In the model with shadowing, the shadowing value X,
typically defined in dB, is added to (or subtracted from) the average received power. X is a
zero means Gaussian distributed random variable with standard deviation .

The Probability Density Function (PDF) of the lognormal distribution is:

The default value for standard deviation is chosen as 5 dB.

82
Path Loss:

Pathloss is the reduction in power density of an electromagnetic wave as it propagates

through space. Path loss may be due to many effects, such as free-space loss, refraction,
diffraction, reflection, aperture-medium coupling loss, and absorption.

Path loss can be represented by the path loss exponent, whose value is normally in the range
of 2 to 4, where 2 is for propagation in free space and 4 is for relatively loss environments. In
NetSim, the default value for path loss exponent is taken as 2.

Path loss is usually expressed in dB. In its simplest form, the path loss can be calculated
using the formula

Where L is the path loss in decibels, is the path loss exponent, d is the distance between the
transmitter and the receiver, usually measured in meters, and C is a constant which accounts
for system losses.

A simplified formula for the path loss between two isotropic antennas in free space:

L (in dBm) = ( )

Where L is the path loss in decibels, is the wavelength and d is the transmitter-receiver
distance in the same units as the wavelength.

Calculation of Received Power:

In general,

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

The path loss model used is described in IEEE Standard 802.15.2-2003[B9], which stipulates
a two-segment function with a path loss exponent of 2.0 for the first 8 m and then a path loss
exponent of 3.3 thereafter. The formula given in IEEE Standard 802.15.2 is shown in
Equation (E.1).

83
 pl(d) = {
( )

Where, for 2.4 Ghz

pl(1) = 40.2 dBm
pl(8) = 58.5 dBm
= 2, the path loss exponent for d 8m
= 3.3, the path loss exponent for d > 8m

Reference: IEEE Standard 802.15.4 2006 Part 15.4: Wireless Medium Access Control
(MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area
Networks (WPANs).

84
3.8 Internet of Things
3.8.1 New Experiment
In the Simulation menu select Simulation
New Internet of Things

3.8.2 Introduction
Internet of Things (IoT) is an ecosystem of connected physical objects that are accessible
through the internet. It is the network of physical objects that can communicate, sense or
interact with their internal states or the external environment.

The thing in IoT could be a person with a heart monitor or an automobile with built-in-
sensors, i.e. objects that have been assigned an IP address and have the ability to collect and
transfer data over a network without manual assistance or intervention.

NetSim IOT is modeled as a wireless sensor network that can connect to the internet via a
6LoPAN Gateway. The default protocols in the WSN section is AODV with IPv6 addressing
in L3 and 802.15.4 MAC & PHY. This WSN sends data to a LowPAN Gateway which has a
Zigbee (802.15.4) interface and a WAN Interface. The Zigbee interface allows wireless
connectivity to the WSN while the WAN interface connects to the internet.

Any WSN comprises of two parts, the sensing part and the network communication part.
NetSim is "agnostic" to the sensing and this sensing is abstracted as an Agent (sometime
known as Agent based modeling). Whatever is sensed is finally converted to a "packet" and it
is from this point on that NetSim simulation can be used.

NetSim does not provide any connectivity / interfacing to real hardware / sensors. However,
NetSim provides interfacing to MATLAB or via text files. In case of text files, real sensors
can write their data to files which can then taken as input by NetSim.

85
3.8.3 Create Scenario

Total Grid Length (m) settings allows the user to set the
total environment length of IOT Networks containing
sensors, LoWPAN gateway, wired nodes, routers,
switches, access point, wireless nodes.
Sensor Grid Settings (m) allows the user to set the
environment length for placing the sensors uniformly or
randomly. Users can manually create the scenario by
selecting Via click and drop, or place the sensors
automatically in an uniform or random manner.

Adding Sensor - Click on Sensor Node icon in toolbar and click and drop inside the grid.

Adding LoWPAN gateway- LoWPAN is an acronym of Low power Wireless Personal Area
Networks. The LoWPAN IoT gateway functions as a border router in a LoWPAN network,
connecting a wireless IPv6 network to the Internet. Designed to send IPv6 packets over
IEEE802.15.4-based networks and implementing open IP standards including TCP, UDP,
HTTP and more, the standard offers end-to-end addressable nodes, allowing a router to
connect the network to IP.
Click on the LoWPAN gateway icon in the toolbar and click and drop inside the grid.

Users can also add devices as shown in Internetworks scenario.

3.8.4 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

User need not connect the sensors with LoWPAN gateway using wireless links.
Interconnection among other devices is same as in Internetworks.
LoWPAN gateway can be connected with router using wired links.
Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements.
o Routing Protocol in Application Layer of router and all user editable properties in
DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access Point and Wireless Node are Global
i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that
network.

86
 o In Sensor Node, Routing Protocol in Network Layer and all user editable properties
in DataLink Layer, Physical Layer and Power are Global i.e. changing properties
in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that network.
Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.
Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

87
3.8.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics(Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.8.6 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.8.7 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ IOT, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

88
3.9 Zigbee
3.9.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select Simulation

New ZigBee Networks

3.9.2 Create Scenario

Adding Node -
Click on the ZigBee icon in the toolbar and click and drop it inside the grid (i.e.
Visibility Range - The systems can move and communicate in this range only).
A Node cannot be placed on another Node. A Node cannot float outside the grid.

Adding PAN Coordinator - Click on the PAN Coordinator icon in the toolbar and click
and drop inside the grid.

Set Environment Properties

Right click in side of the on the Environment and click Properties.

3.9.3 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties

On opening an already configured properties of environment, the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

3.9.4 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. In Zigbee Node, Routing Protocol in Network
Layer and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer, Physical Layer and Power are

89
 Global i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that
network.

Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.9.5 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

90
3.9.6 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.9.7 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ Zigbee, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

3.9.8 SINR, BER and Propagation models for 802.15.4

SINR Calculation:

Analogous to the SNR used often in wired communications systems, the SINR is defined as
the power of a certain signal of interest divided by the sum of the interferencepower (from all
the other interfering signals) and the power of some background noise.
The interference power is the difference between the total power received by the receiver and
the power received from one particular transmitter.

The background thermal noise in dBm at room temperature is given by:

P (in dBm) =

91
where f is the Bandwidth in Hertz. For 802.15.4, f = 2 MHz

( )
P (in mW) =

Therefore, SINR in dBm is calculated as:

SINR (in dBm) = ( )

Bit Error Rate (BER) Calculation:

The bit error rate (BER) is the number of bit errors divided by the total number of transferred
bits during a studied time interval. The BER results were obtained using the analytical model
from IEEE standard 802.15.2-2003 [B9]. The calculation follows the approach outlined in
5.3.2 of that standard.

( ( ))
BER = ( ) ( ) ( )

Where SINR = Signal-to-Interference-plus-Noise Ratio. BER should be between 0 and 1.

Propagation Loss:

Three different and mutually independent propagation phenomena influence the power of the
received signal: path loss, shadowing and multipath fading.

Shadowing:

Slow shadowing in wireless network is the attenuation caused by buildings or any obstacles
between a transmitter and a receiver. In the model with shadowing, the shadowing value X,
typically defined in dB, is added to (or subtracted from) the average received power. X is a
zero means Gaussian distributed random variable with standard deviation .

The Probability Density Function (PDF) of the lognormal distribution is:

92
The default value for standard deviation is chosen as 5 dB.

Path Loss:

Pathloss is the reduction in power density of an electromagnetic wave as it propagates

through space. Path loss may be due to many effects, such as free-space loss, refraction,
diffraction, reflection, aperture-medium coupling loss, and absorption.

Path loss can be represented by the path loss exponent, whose value is normally in the range
of 2 to 4, where 2 is for propagation in free space and 4 is for relatively loss environments. In
NetSim, the default value for path loss exponent is taken as 2.

Path loss is usually expressed in dB. In its simplest form, the path loss can be calculated
using the formula

Where L is the path loss in decibels, is the path loss exponent, d is the distance between the
transmitter and the receiver, usually measured in meters, and C is a constant which accounts
for system losses.

A simplified formula for the path loss between two isotropic antennas in free space:

L (in dBm) = ( )

Where L is the path loss in decibels, is the wavelength and d is the transmitter-receiver
distance in the same units as the wavelength.

Calculation of Received Power:

In general,

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

The path loss model used is described in IEEE Standard 802.15.2-2003[B9], which stipulates
a two-segment function with a path loss exponent of 2.0 for the first 8 m and then a path loss
93
exponent of 3.3 thereafter. The formula given in IEEE Standard 802.15.2 is shown in
Equation (E.1).

pl(d) = {
( )

Where, for 2.4 Ghz

pl(1) = 40.2 dBm
pl(8) = 58.5 dBm
= 2, the path loss exponent for d 8m
= 3.3, the path loss exponent for d > 8m

Reference: IEEE Standard 802.15.4 2006

Part 15.4: Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY)
Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks (WPANs).

94
3.10 Cognitive Radio
Cognitive Radio Network simulation is available
from v7 of NetSim. Cognitive Radio Networks
allows you to connect, if required, with Ethernet,
Wireless LAN, IP Routing, TCP / UDP and
allows users to log packet and event (in NetSim
standard version only) traces.

3.10.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu select New Cognitive Radio Networks.

3.10.2 Create Scenario

Adding Devices
Cognitive Radio Networks comes with the palette of various devices like Cognitive Radio
CPE, Cognitive Radio Base Station, Switch, Router, Wired Node, Wireless Node, Access
point, Incumbent etc.
Select the desired devices in the toolbar and click and drop on the environment.
To remove devices, right click on the particular device and then click Remove.
Connect the devices
Select the appropriate link in the toolbar and connect the devices by clicking on the device 1
and device 2.

3.10.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. Routing Protocol in Application Layer of
router and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access
Point and Wireless Node are Global i.e. changing properties in one node will
automatically reflect in the others in that network.

95
 Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.10.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics

(Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

96
3.10.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar. Set the Simulation Time and click on
Simulate.

3.10.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ CognitiveRadio, which the user can open using
NetSim and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and
their default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

Notes on Cognitive Radio implementation in NetSim:

CR BS allocates max one symbol per CPE. If the generation rate is more than the data
filled in one symbol then allocation fails and it results in zero throughput.
The first symbol is reserved for CR control frames or any broadcast PDU
NetSim gives App layer throughput which is lesser than that of MAC layer
throughput because of
TCP connection establishment
ARP set-up
Service flow creation CPE-BS and BS-CPE
BW request
To avoid the above effects
Generate custom traffic
Set DL/UL Ratio as 1:1 so that the BS transmits whatever it receives
Run UDP in transport layer
Use static ARP
Run Simulation for more than 100 sec

97
3.11 LTE
3.11.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu selectNewLTE

Networks.

3.11.2 Create Scenario

Adding MME- Click on the Router icon in the tool bar, click and drop the MME (Mobility
Management Entity) onto the environment.
Adding ENB - Click on the Evolved node B (ENB) icon in the toolbar and click it onto the
environment.
Adding UE
Click on the UE (User Equipment) icon from the Node icon in the toolbar, click and
drop it on the ENB coverage area.
UE cannot be placed on another UE. It has to be clicked and placed on the ENB node
coverage area.
Connect the devices
Select the appropriate link in the toolbar and connect the devices by clicking on the device 1
and device 2.

3.11.3 Set Node, Link and Application Properties

Right click on the appropriate node or link and select Properties. Then modify the
parameters according to the requirements. Routing Protocol in Application Layer of
router and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer and Physical Layer of Access
Point and Wireless Node are Global i.e. changing properties in one node will
automatically reflect in the others in that network. Transmission Mode Index of ENB and
UE are also Global properties.

Select the Application Button on the ribbon and click on the empty region between the
Grid Environment and the ribbon. Now right click on Application and select Properties.
Multiple applications can be generated by using add button in Application properties.

98
 Set the values according to requirement and click Accept.

3.11.4 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics (Optional)

Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

99
3.11.5 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.11.6 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ LTE, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

100
3.12 Military Radio TDMA link 16
3.12.1 New Experiment

In the Simulation menu,

Select New Advanced Wireless Networks
MANET

3.12.2 Create Scenario

Click on the Node icon in the Toolbar, and then click on Wireless Node.
Next, click on the environment where you want to drop it inside the grid.
(Note: A Node cannot be placed on another Node. A Node cannot float
outside of the grid.)

3.12.3 Set Node Properties

Right click on the appropriate node to select Properties.

In Interface1_Wireless, go to DATALINK_LAYER and PHYSICAL_LAYER section

and change the Protocol to TDMA. In Wireless Node, Routing Protocol in Network
Layer and all user editable properties in DataLink Layer, Physical Layer and Power are
Global i.e. changing properties in one node will automatically reflect in the others in that
network.

101
3.12.4 Set Environment Properties

Right click anywhere on the Environment Grid and select Properties.

Select the Channel Characteristics and set the parameters accordingly.

102
3.12.5 Modifying/Viewing/Accepting Properties
On opening an already configured properties of environment, the input fields will be frozen
(i.e. the input cannot be changed).To modify these values click on the Modify button in the
screen. Now the input value can be changed. Click on the Accept button, the modified values
will be saved.

3.12.6 Enable Packet Trace, Event Trace & Dynamic Metrics

(Optional)
Click Packet Trace / Event Trace icon in the tool bar. Set the name and path and select the
required attributes. To get detailed help, please refer section 6.5, 6.6 and 6.3 respectively.
Select Dynamic Metrics icon for enabling Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

3.12.7 Run Simulation

Click on Run Simulation icon on the top toolbar.

Set the Simulation Time and click on Simulate.

3.12.8 Sample Experiment

A sample network is created in Configuration.xml file which is located inside<NetSim

installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ TDMA, which the user can open using NetSim
and understand how devices are connected among themselves for that network and their
default properties.

Furthermore, users can open this Configuration.xml file using Visual Studio 2010 and
analyze how to write a designed network scenario manually. Further information is provided
in Understanding Configuration.xml file under Running NetSim via CLI chapter.

103
4 Traffic generator in NetSim
(Application Models)
NetSim allows users to model and simulate the applications:

1. CBR
2. Custom
3. Database
4. FTP
5. Email
6. HTTP
7. PEER_TO_PEER
8. Video
9. Voice
10. Sensor App
11. Erlang Call
12. Emulator (Only if Emulator Add-on is present)

To set up the application click and drop the application icon from the tool bar as shown
below.

Right click on the application icon and select properties

104
This properties window allows you to set the traffic. You can add (or) delete one or more
applications.

4.1 Common properties for all the traffic types

Application ID

This property represents the unique identification number of the application.

Start time

This property represents the start time of the application in seconds.

End time

This property represent the end time of the application in seconds.

Note: Suppose Start time is 1 and end time is 10 then application starts generating traffic
at 1st second and ends at 10th second.

Source Count

This property represents number of sources for the application. Voice, Video, FTP,
Database and Custom applications have only one source.

Source ID

This property represents the unique identification number of the source.

Destination Count

This property represents number of destinations for the application. Voice, Video,
FTP, Database and Custom applications have only one destination.

Destination ID

This property represents the unique identification numbers of the destination.

4.2 CBR
Packet Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution is

Constant

Packet Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 1460 bytes is entered.

105
 Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution is

Constant

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 20000
Micro Sec is entered.

4.3 Custom
Packet Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Packet Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 1460 bytes is entered.

Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 20000
Micro Sec is entered.

4.4 Voice
Codec

Codec is the component of any voice system that translates between analog speech and
the bits used to transmit them. Every codec transmits a burst of data in a packet that can

106
 be reconstructed into voice. Five different standards of voice codecs are given which can
be selected depending on the variations required.

Packet Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Packet Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 160 bytes is entered.

Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 20000
Micro Sec is entered.

Service Type

CBR - CBR stands for Constant Bit Rate. Packets of constant size are generated at
constant inter arrival times.

VBR - VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. The two types of Suppression Model that
can be selected are,

Deterministic
Markov Chain

4.5 Video
Video is an electronic medium for the recording, copying and broadcasting of moving
visual images.

Model Type

107
 Continuous Normal VBR This model is the simplest of all models. It uses
Normal Distribution for the generation of bits per pixel. In this model, consecutive
packet sizes are independent of each other.
o Frames per second Number of frames arriving per second. This is in
the range of 10 50.
o Pixels per frame -Number of pixelsin each frame. This is in the range
of 10000 100000.
o Bits per pixel () Mean value of the normal distribution used to
generate the value of bits per pixel.
o Bits per pixel () Standard Deviation of the normal distribution used
to generate the value of bits per pixel.

Continuous State Autoregressive Markov This model incorporates the

autocorrelation between the frames. Also, current packet size depends on the
previous packet size via the first order autoregressive Markov process.

o Frames per second Number of frames arriving per second. This is in

the range of 10 50.
o Pixels per frame - Number of pixels in each frame. This is in the range
of 10000 100000.
o Constant A First order autoregressive Markov process(n) can be
generated by the recursive relation (n)=a(n-1)+bw(n).
o Constant B First order autoregressive Markov process (n) can be
generated by the recursive relation (n)=a (n-1)+bw(n).
o Eta The steady-state average E()and discreet auto covariance C(n)
are given byE() = ( b / (1-a) ) C(n)=(b2/(1-a2))an where is the
Gaussian parameter.

Quantized State Continuous Time Markov In this model the bit rate is
quantized into finite discreet levels. This model takes uniform quantization step as
A bits/pixel. There are M + 1 possible levels (0, A, .., MA).Transitions
between levels are assumed to occur with exponential rates that may depend on
the current level. This model is approximating the bit rate by a continuous time
process (t) with discreet jumps at random Poisson time.

108
 o Frames per second Number of frames arriving per second. This is in
the range of 10 50.
o Pixels per frame - Number of pixels in each frame. This is in the range
of 10000 100000.
o No of Multiplexed Sources This model considers the aggregate
instantaneous input rate N(t) instead of the single source bit rate (t).
The total rate is the sum of N independent random processes each with
mean E() and variance C(0) at steady state.Therefore, the steady state-
state mean of N(t) will be E( N)=N x E() bits/pixel.
o Quantization Level This model takes uniform quantization step as A
bits/pixel. There are M + 1 possible levels (0, A, .., MA). Transitions
between levels are assumed to occur with exponential rates that may
depend on the current level.

Simple IPB Composite ModelIn this model, the frames are organized as
IBBPBBPBBPBBIBBPBB i.e., 12 frames in a Group of
Pictures(GOP).Generate X0 from a Gaussian distribution N(0, y 0).Set initial
value N0= 0, D0 = 1.

For k = 1, 2,, N-1, calculate kj , j = 1, 2,,k iteratively using the following

formulae

Nk = r(k) j=1k-1k-1,j r(k-j)

Dk = Dk-1 (N2k-1/Dk-1)

kk = Nk / Dk

kj = k-1, j-kkk-1,k-j j=1,.,k-1

mk = j = 1kkjXk-j

y k = (1- 2kk) yk-1

Finally, eachXk is chosen from N(mk, y k). Thus we get a process X with ACF
approximating to r(k).

The auto correlation function can be calculated in a recursive way as follows:

r(0) = 1, r(k+1) = ((k+d)/(k+1))r(k)

109
 where d= H-0.5.

H is called the Hurst parameter k- is used as the ACF of a self-similar

process.We get the value of H parameter for a self-similar process using the
relationship,

= 2 2H

Distribution of these data is Gaussian. For data to be Beta distributed, the

following mapping is being used

Yk = F-1 (FN(Xk)), k>0

Xk :Self-similar Gaussian process,

FN :The cumulative probability of normal distribution,

F-1: The inverse cumulative probability functions of the Beta model.

o Frames per second Number of frames arriving per second. This is in

the range of 10 50.
o Hurst IRefer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Hurst B Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Hurst P Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Gamma I Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Gamma B Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Gamma P Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Eta I Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Eta B Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.
o Eta P Refer i-button help of Simple IPB Composite Model.

4.6 FTP
File Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

File Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen distribution.
By default 100000 bytes is entered.

110
 File_Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 5 Sec is
entered.

4.7 Database
Transaction Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Packet_Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 10000 bytes is entered.

Transaction Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 1000000
Micro Sec is entered.

111
4.8 Peer to Peer
NOTE: Devices must have TCP enabled in Transport layer for implementing peer to peer application
successfully.

File Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Value (Bytes): This represents the size of the file in bytes.

Piece size (Bytes): Each file is divided into equal sized pieces and then the piece of the
data is transmitted. This property represents the size of each piece.

4.9 HTTP
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is a protocol that utilizes TCP to transfer its
information between computers (usually Web servers and clients). Hence in NetSim, it is
imperative that TCP is enabled in the Source Node.

Http_request_interarrival_time

This indicates the time gap between the pages.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time (micro sec): This represents the rate at which client sends the
requests.

Page_property

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Page Count: This represents the number of pages received from the server.

Page Size (Bytes): This represents the size of each page that is received from the server.

112
4.10 Email
Email_Receive

This represents the rate at which emails are received.

Duration_Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Duration: Time gap between two successive receiving emails in seconds.

Email_Size_Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Email_Size: It represents the size of the email that is received.

Email_Send

This represents the rate at which emails are sent.

Duration_Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Duration: Time gap between two successive sending emails in seconds.

Email_Size_Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Email_Size: It represents the size of the email that is sent.

4.11 Sensor App

Packet Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant

113
 Exponential

Packet Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 50 bytes is entered.

Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 1000000
Micro Sec is entered.

4.12 Erlang Call

Packet Size

Distribution: The options available for distribution is

Constant

Packet Size (Bytes): Sets the size of the packets being generated by the chosen
distribution. By default 160 bytes is entered.

Inter Arrival Time

This indicates the time gap between packets.

Distribution: The options available for distribution is

Constant

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between packets. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher generation rate and the vice versa. By default 20000
Micro Sec is entered.

Call

Duration Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

114
 Constant
Exponential

Duration: The options available

Inter Arrival Time: Enter the average inter-arrival time between calls. A lower inter-
arrival time would lead to a higher call rate and the vice versa. By default 60 Sec is
entered.

IAT Distribution: The options available for distribution are,

Constant
Exponential

Constant

Service

Service Type

CBR - CBR stands for Constant Bit Rate. Packets of constant size are generated at
constant inter arrival times.

VBR - VBR stands for Variable Bit Rate. The two types of Suppression Model that
can be selected are,

Deterministic
Markov Chain

Success ratio: Sets the ratio of the packets that are not silenced during VBR calls.

4.13 Emulator
NOTE- Will be present only when Emulator Add-on is installed

Emulation

Source Real IP: Specifies the real IP Address of source device in Emulation

Source Port: Specifies the Port no used for transmission by Application running in
source device

115
 Destination Real IP: Specifies the real IP Address of destination device in Emulation

Destination Port: Specifies the Port no used for reception by Application running in
destination device

4.14 Priority and QoS of Applications

The various traffics generated in NetSim have the following priority and QoS values:

Application Type Priority Value Priority QoS Class

Voice One way 8 High RTPS
Voice Two way 8 High UGS
Video 6 Medium nRTPS
FTP 2 Low BE
Database 2 Low BE
Custom 2 Low BE

Note: Priority of Normal has a Priority Value of 4 and nRTPS QoS Class. Ex: Video
over TCP.

116
4.15 Modelling Poisson arrivals in NetSim
Whats a Poisson process, and how is it useful?

Any time you have events which occur individually at random moments, but which tend to
occur at an average rate when viewed as a group, you have a Poisson process.

For example, we can estimate that a certain node generates 1200 packets per minute. These
are randomly generated throughput the hour throughout the 60 seconds, but there are on
average 1200 packets per minute.

If 1200 packets generated per minute that, on average, one packet is generated every 60 /
1200 = 0.05 seconds. So, lets define a variable = 1/ 0.05 = 20 and call it the rate
parameter. The rate parameter is a measure of frequency: the average rate of events
(packets) per unit of time (in this case, seconds).

Knowing this, we can ask questions like, what is the probability that a packet will be
generated within the next second? Whats the probability within the next 10 seconds? Theres
a well-known function to answer such questions. Its called the cumulative distribution
function for the exponential distribution, and it looks like this:

F(x) =1ex

Basically, the more time passes, the more likely it is that, a packet is generated. The word
exponential, in this context, actually refers to exponential decay. As time passes, the
probability of having no packets generated decays towards zero and correspondingly, the
probability of having at least one packet generated increases towards one.

117
Plugging in a few values, we find that:

The probability of generating a packet within the next 0.05 seconds is F(0.05) 0.63
The probability of generating a packet within 1 second is F(1) 0.999999998

In particular, note that after 0.05 seconds the prescribed average time between packets the
probability is F(0.05) 0.63 .

Generating Poisson arrivals in NetSim

We simply write a function to determine the exact amount of time until the next packet. This
function should return random numbers, but not the uniform kind of random number
produced by most generators. We want to generate random numbers in a way that follows our
exponential distribution.
Given that the inverse of the exponential function is ln, its pretty easy to write this
analytically, where U is the random value between 0 and 1:

Next Time when a packet is generated =ln(1- RandNo) /

This is exactly the code used in NetSim, and this is available in the source C file in
../NetSim_Standard/Simulation/Application/Distribution.c. In the case exponential
distribution, you would see

case Distribution_Exponential: /*Exponential Distribution Function*/

fFirstArg = args[0];
nRandOut = fnRandomNo(10000000, &fRand, uSeed, uSeed1);
fRandomNumber = (double) (fRand);
fFirstArg = 1 / fFirstArg;
*fDistOut = (double) -(1 / fFirstArg)* (double) logl(1 - fRandomNumber);

The simple way of selecting this via the UI is to selecting exponential distribution for inter-
arrival time when modelling application properties.

118
5 Running simulation via CLI
5.1 Running NetSim via CLI

Note: This feature is available from v7 onwards. In v8, NetSim can be run via CLI for
Internetworks, Advanced Wireless Networks MANET, Wireless Sensor Networks, Internet
of Things, ZigBee Networks, BGP Networks, Cellular Networks, LTE Networks and Cognitive
Radio Networks only. For other networks NetSim v8 can only be run via GUI.

Advanced users can model their simulation via a configuration file (which can be created
without the NetSim GUI) and run the simulation from command line. This is typically done
in cases where very large networks are to be simulated (it takes too long to create it in the
GUI), or to run a series of simulations automatically (Ref Help on NetSim Batch Processing).
The configuration file contains all required information to run the simulation including the
network topology, devices, links, traffic, statistics, traces etc.

To run Simulation in NetSim through command line interface (CLI), the following steps have
to be followed.

Step 1: Note the App Path

App path is the file location in the system in which NetSim has been installed.

The app path can be found out by right clicking the NetSim Shortcut in the desktop and
selecting Open file location (In Vista and Windows 7) or Find Target (In Windows XP). The
app path will be something like C:\Program Files\NetSim Standard\bin, depending on
where NetSim is installed.

Note: The path to the bin folder of the app path must be mentioned

Step 2: Note the IO Path

IO path (Input/output Path) is the path where the input and output files of an application is
written. This is similar to the temp path of windows OS. For NetSim, the IO path can be got
by Start Run %temp%/NetSim. Once you reach this folder, the user can notice that the
path would be something like C:\Users\Ram\AppData\Local\Temp\NetSim

119
The IO path is the path where the Configuration.xml (NetSim Configuration file) of the
scenario, that will be simulated, should be present.

App path and IO path can also be same, i.e., Configuration.xml can be placed inside the app
path (if the app path has write permission). Otherwise, users can create a folder for IO path
and Configuration.xml can be placed inside that folder.

Note: Sample configuration.xml files are available in the <NetSim installed Directory>/Docs/
Sample_Configurations folder of the NetSim install directory inside the respective protocol
folder names.

Step 3: Running NetSim through command line for Simulation

To run NetSim through command line, copy the app path where NetSimCore.exe is present
and paste it in the command prompt.

>cd <app path>

For floating/roaming licenses, type the following in the command prompt.The type of license
can be seen by clicking on NetSim Help About NetSim

>NetSimCore.exe<space> -apppath<space><app path><space>-iopath<space><io

path><space>-license<space>5053@<Server IP Address>

Where,

<app path> contains all files of NetSim including NetSimCore.exe

<iopath> contains Configuration.xml and Configuration.xsd (Configuration.xsd is
available in bin folder)
5053 is the port number through which the system communicates with the license server
i.e the system in which the dongle is running (for floating license users)
<Server IP Address> is the ip address of the system where NetSim license server (dongle)
is running. Please contact your network administrator / lab in charge to know the IP
address of the PC where the NetSim license server is running.

120
The following screenshot is the example of running NetSim through CLI where the ip address
of the NetSim license server is 192.168.0.2

For node-locked licenses, type the following in the command prompt

>NetSimCore.exe<space> -apppath<space><app path><space>-iopath<space><io

path><space>

Where,

<app path> contains all files of NetSim including NetSimCore.exe

<iopath> contains Configuration.xml and Configuration.xsd
The following screenshot is the example of running NetSim through CLI for the node locked
license.

Simulation will be completed successfully and the text files that are requested by the end user
in Configuration.xml will be written in the <iopath>.

Note: If the folder name contains white space, then mention the folder path within double
quotes while specifying the folder name in the command prompt. For example, if app path
contains white space, then the app path must be mentioned within double quotes in the
command prompt as given below.

121
 >cd <app path>

>NetSimCore.exe -apppath <app path> -iopath<io path>-license

5053@<License Server IP Address>

To know more about the options that are available to run NetSim via CLI, type the following
in the command prompt.

>cd <app path>

>NetSimCore.exe -h

122
123
5.2 Understanding Configuration.xml file
Lets see under the hood to know how NetSim is working.

Using UI

GUI
Using CLI

Configuratio
Metrics.txt
n.xml

Protocol
Engine +
Stack +
Kernel

Fig.1. NetSim Architectural Overview

To model a scenario in order to generate metrics in NetSim, GUI will write all the details
about the devices used in the scenario and its properties, the links used and their properties,
the properties of the environment being used, etc. in Configuration.xml just when the user
performs the simulation.

The back-end engine that contains dlls and NetSimCore.exe will read this Configuration.xml,
execute the simulation and write output metrics files (in .txt format) to the IO path. Then, the
GUI will display the metrics based on the text files written by the backend.

In order to run NetSim through command line (CLI), the user has to create the
Configuration.xml furnishing all the details about the devices, links and the environment of
the desired scenario.

124
5.2.1 How to use Visual Studio to edit the Configuration file?

To edit the Configuration.xml, xml editor is required. There are various xml editors available
in the market. Visual Studio 2010 is one of the xml editors that can be used to edit the
Configuration.xml with efficacy.

This section shows limelight on how to use Visual Studio to edit the Configuration.xml.

XML view provides an editor for editing raw XML and provides IntelliSense and color
coding.

After you type the element name and press the CTRL+ SPACE, you will be presented with a
list of attributes that the element supports. This is known as IntelliSense. Using this feature,
you can select the options that are required to create the desired scenario.

Color coding is followed to indicate the elements and the attributes in a unique fashion.

The following screenshot displays the Configuration.xml which is opened through the Visual
Studio.

To reformat it, click on Reformat Selection icon.

125
5.2.2 Sections of Configuration file

These are the different sections in Configuration.xml:

EXPERIMENT_INFORMATION
GUI_INFORMATION
NETWORK_CONFIGURATION
SIMULATION_PARAMETER
PROTOCOL_CONFIGURATION
STATISTICS_COLLECTION

EXPERIMENT_INFORMATION:

This section contains the details about the user credentials, such as the user mode
(Admin or Exam or Practice), experiment name, date on which the experiment is created and
the comments about the experiment. This section plays a significant role while running
NetSim through GUI.

GUI_INFORMATION:

This section contains the GUI information like the environment length, view type etc.
and the network name which is desired to be run.

NETWORK_CONFIGURATION:

This section is used to configure the devices and the links of the desired network at
the each layer of the OSI stack. It consists of DEVICE_CONFIGURATION, CONNECTION
and APPLICATION_CONFIGURATION. DEVICE_CONFIGURATION configures the
devices in the desired network while the CONNECTION configures the links in the desired
network and APPLICATION configures the Applications.

SIMULATION_PARAMETER:

Simulation time and seed values are described in this section.

126
PROTOCOL_CONFIGURATION:

IPV4 and static ARP are enabled or disabled in this section. The text files illustrating
the static routing and static ARP can be obtained by enabling the corresponding tags in the
Configuration.xml.

STATISTICS_COLLECTION:

The packet trace and the event trace can be observed in the text files which are created
by enabling the tags in this section. The required fields of the packet trace can be enabled in
the PACKET_TRACE while the event trace can be enabled in the EVENT_TRACE of this
section.

5.2.3 Sample Configuration file

Sample Configuration.xml file will be installed in user system along with the software at
<NetSim installed Path>\Docs\ Sample_Configuration\ <Network Technology>. User can
open and edit these files using Visual Studio 2010 or any XML editor. The purpose of
providing the sample Configuration.xml file is to assist the user in writing a network
scenario manually by analyzing the format for that specific network technology.

127
6 Analysis
6.1 Performance Metrics
NetSim provides distinct quantitative metrics at various abstraction levels such as Network
Metrics, Link Metrics, TCP Metrics, Application Metrics, etc at the end of simulation. With
the help of metrics, users can analyze the behavior of the modeled network and can compare
the impact of different algorithms on end-to-end behavior.

After simulation of a scenario is performed, the NetSim Performance Metrics are shown on
the screen as shown below

The Performance metrics can be further subdivided into sections

Network metrics: Here users can view the values of the metrics obtained based on
the overall network.
Link Metrics: Displays the values of the metrics pertaining to each link
Link_Id-It is the unique Id for the link.
Packets_Transmitted-It is the total number of packets transmitted in the link.
Along with data packets, it includes protocol control packets like
ARPRequest, ARPReply, TCP_ACK, TCP_SYN, RTS, CTS,
WLAN_ACK,OSPF_ HELLO, RIP packets etc.
Error_Packets-Total number of packets error in the link inclusive of data and
control packets.

128
 Collided_Packets-Total number of packets collided in the link including data
and control packets.
Bytes_Transmitted-It is the total number of bytes transmitted in the link. It is
equal to the sum of the Payload_Transmitted and Overhead_Transmitted
transmitted in the link.
Payload_Transmitted-It is the total payload transmitted in the link.
Overhead_Transmitted-It is the total overhead transmitted in the link. It
includes the layer wise overheads and all control packets in the link.

Queue Metrics: Displays the values of the queue metrics for the devices containing
buffer queue like routers, access points etc.
Device Id-Unique id number of the device.
Port Id-Unique id number of the port of the device. This is also called as
interface id.
Queued Packet-Number of packets queued at a particular port of a device.
Dequeued Packet-Number of packets removed from the queue at a particular
port of device
Dropped Packet-Number of packets dropped at a particular port of a device.

Protocol metrics: Displays the protocol based metrics which are implemented in
Network scenario. Metrics will vary depending upon the type of network simulated.

Device metrics: Displays device related metrics like ARP table, IP forwarding tables.
This is also dependent upon the type of network

Application Metrics: Displays the various metrics based on the Application running
in the network scenario.
Application Id- It is the unique Id of the application running at the source.
Source Id-It is the unique Id of the device running that particular application.
Destination Id-It is the unique Id of the destination device.
Packets Transmitted-It is the total number of packets generated and
transmitted from the source.

129
 Packets Received-It is the total number of packets received at the destination.
Duplicate packet received-It is the number of packets which are received
more than once at the destination. This generally happens due to re-
transmissions.
Payload Transmitted-It is the total payload transmitted in bytes. It is equal
to the product of Packets Transmitted and Packet Size.
Payload Received-It is the total payload received at the destination in bytes.

Throughput-Total user data (or) payload delivered to their respective

destination every second.
Calculation:

Delay-It is the average amount of time taken calculated for all the packets to
reach the destination from the source.

Note about metrics: The metrics are calculated at each layer and might not be equivalent to
the same metric calculated at a different layer. For exactness and precision we recommend
users also verify the results with the event trace & packet trace generated by NetSim.

Note about packet transmission: The Network Stack forms the core of NetSims architecture.
The Stack consists of five IN and OUT events: PHYSICAL_IN, MAC_IN, NETWORK_IN,
TRANSPORT_IN, APPLICATION_IN and APPLICATION_OUT,TRANSPORT_OUT,
NETWORK_OUT, MAC_OUT, PHYSICAL_OUT. All the packets when transferred
between devices go through the above events in order. IN events occur when the packet is
entering a device and all the OUT events occur when packet leaves a device.
The following table lists the various files that will be written in the NetSim install directory/
IO path on completion of simulation.

130
 S. No File Contents

Contains the metrics of the network

1 Metrics.txt
that is simulated recently.

Contains the data required to plot the

2 MetricsGraph.txt graph between the various
parameters in metrics against time
Contains the status of the
3 LicenseErrorLog.txt communication between the NetSim
dongle and the client.
This file will be written while
reading the Configuration file.
4 ConfigLog.txt
Provides errors if there are errors in
the configuration file.
Contains the logs as the control
5 LogFile.txt flows across various layers in the
Network Stack
Contains the detailed packet
6 PacketTrace.txt information. This file will be written
only when Packet Trace is enabled.
Contains the information about each
7 EventTrace.txt event. This file will be written only
when Event Trace is enabled.

If NetSim runs via the UI, then the metrics will be displayed automatically at the end of
simulation with illustrative pie charts and tables.
If NetSim runs via CLI, then the metrics will be written into Metrics.txt and
MetricsGraph.txt.

131
6.2 Packet Animation
NetSim provides the feature to play and record animations to the user. Packet animation
enables users to watch traffic flow through the network for in-depth visualization and
analysis.

User has the following options before running simulation:

No animation,
Record the animation and
Play and record animation while running simulation.

Click here to record packet animation

The packet animation would then be recorded and the user can view the animation from the
metrics screen as shown below:

Click here to view packet animation

132
When packet animation is enabled, a screen with the following toolbar appears:

While viewing packet animation, user can see the flow of packets as well as the type of
packet. Blue color packet denotes control packet, green color is used for data packet and red
color is error/collided packet.

Example showing packet animation: In first figure, CBR data packet is flowing from Switch
D to Node E (green color) and TCP_ACK is sent from Node E to Switch D in second figure
(blue color).

133
6.3 Dynamic Metrics (only in Standard/Pro Version)
Dynamic metrics allows users to monitor the value of a parameter over simulation time.

As of NetSim v8, link and application throughputs can be dynamically plotted. These plots
can be done offline or during simulation. Note that enabling them to be plotted during
simulation would consume a lot of memory and slow down the simulation significantly.

Dynamic metrics can be set by clicking on the dynamic metrics icon in the GUI, and
selecting those metrics that you wish to monitor.

Upon completion of the simulation dynamic metrics plots can be viewed by clicking on Link
throughput in Metrics screen.

134
6.4 Analytics Menu (Multiple Experiments)
Under the Simulation menu click Analytics to view the Analytics screen. This module is
designed to enable comparison of performance metrics of multiple experiments. A graphing
engineer facilitates plotting of different performance metrics across the different experiments.
This can be used to infer/trend how changes in input parameters affect network performance.
An explanation of the use of the different fields in the Analytics screen is detailed below:

User: This Option can be used to compare different experiments created by a single
user. As Admin is a Super User, he/she can compare all the experiments created by all
the users. Things that cannot be done are,
User to User comparison cannot be made, i.e. two or more different
experiments created by two or more different users cannot be compared.
Experiments of a particular Network cannot be compared with experiments of
other Networks.
In Tool Bar, there are various tabs available like Internetworks, Legacy Networks,
BGP Networks, MPLS Networks, Advanced Wireless Networks - MANET,
Advanced Wireless Networks WiMAX, Cellular Networks, Wireless Sensor
Networks, Personal Area Networks, Cognitive Radio Networks and LTE networks.
Click on the particular Network tab for comparing the performance of protocols
under that Network.
For Internetworks, Advanced Wireless Networks MANET, BGP Networks,
Wireless Sensor Networks, Personal Area Networks, LTE networks and
Cognitive Radio Networks, select the Metrics FileSelect the Metrics File to
add it onto the Metrics Table by using Browse button.
For Other Networks, select the Experiment based on the tab selected. When
one of the tabs is selected, all the experiments saved under the particular
Network will be listed. Click on the Experiment Name to add it onto the
Metrics Table.
Export to .csv - Click on Export to .csv to export the Metrics Table to a
.csv format. This action button will export the contents to a .csv format
that is available.
Print - Click on the Print option to print the Metrics Table. This action
button will fetch the Print dialogue box.

135
 The Graph Field
Select the Metrics - Select the coordinates for Y-axis by clicking on the
dropdown menu.
Graph - Based on the X-axis (i.e. Metrics File/ Experiment selected) and Y-
axis (i.e. Metrics selected by using the dropdown menu above the graph), a
Bar graph will be plotted.
Add metrics file of different experiments to compare.
The Metrics Table- This is the table that is generated when the Experiments are
selected using the Select the Metrics File/ Experiment option.
The first column in the Metrics Table consists of the Check Boxes that are
used to select (i.e. by default all the Experiments are selected) or deselect the
selected Experiments. If an Experiment is selected, then that Experiment
would be compared along with other Experiments, else the Experiment would
not be compared with other Experiments.
The second column in the Metrics Table X button is available. This X
button is used for deleting the Experiment.

136
6.5 Packet Trace (only in Standard/Pro Version)
Introduction:

NetSim allows users to generate trace files which provide detailed packet information useful
for performance validation, statistical analysis and custom code de-bugging. Packet Trace
logs a set of chosen parameters for every packet as it flows through the network such as
arrival times, queuing times, departure times, payload, overhead, errors, collisions etc.

By providing a host of information and parameters of every packet that flows through the
network, packet trace provides necessary forensics for users to catch logical errors without
setting a lot of breakpoints or restarting the program often. Window size variation in TCP,
Route Table Formation in OSPF, Medium Access in Wi-fi, etc, are examples of protocol
functionalities that can be easily understood from the trace.

Note: Turning on Packet Trace will slow down the simulation significantly

By default, the packet tracing option is turned off.

How to enable Packet Trace via UI?

If NetSim runs via the UI, packet trace can be turned on by clicking the Packet Trace
icon in the tool bar and selecting the required fields in the packet trace. NetSim will write the
packet trace to the specified path during simulation.

How to enable Packet Trace via CLI?

If NetSim runs via CLI, then the packet trace can be turned on by enabling the packet
trace in the STATISTICS_COLLECTION tag of the configuration file. NetSim will write the
packet trace to the specified path during simulation.

How to import Packet Trace to Excel?

Step 1: Open Excel sheet, select Data From Text, it will ask for file, then select the trace
file which you want to export to excel sheet.

137
Step 2: Select the file click import, the following window will appear,

Step 3: Click next, the following window will appear, in that select the check box as
mentioned in the following window, and then click Next and Finish button.

138
Packet Trace Metrics:

PACKET_ID Specifies the ID of the Data Packet

SEGMENT_ID Specifies the ID of the segment of the Data Packet
Specifies the type of Packet. It can be Control Packet,
PACKET_TYPE Custom, Peer_to_peer, E-Mail, DataBase, FTP, Video,
Voice, HTTP
Specifies the type of Control Packet transmitted. It can
be TCP_SYN, TCP_SYN_ACK, TCP_ACK,
CONTROL_PACKET_TYPE
WLAN_ACK, ICMP_ECHO_REQUEST,
ICMP_ECHO_REPLY etc.
SOURCE_ID Specifies the Node ID of the source device
DESTINATION_ID Specifies the Node ID of the destination device
Specifies the Node ID of the device transmitting the
TRANSMITTER_ID
packet
RECEIVER_ID Specifies the Node ID of the device receiving the packet

APP_LAYER_ARRIVAL_TIME Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the data

packet is generated at Application Layer of source

139
 device

Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet

TRX_LAYER_ARRIVAL_TIME
reaches the Transport Layer of source device
Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet
NW_LAYER_ARRIVAL_TIME
reaches the Network Layer of source device
Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet
MAC_LAYER_ARRIVAL_TIME
reaches the Data Link Layer of source device
Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet
PHY_LAYER_ARRIVAL_TIME
reaches the Physical Layer of source device
Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet
PHY_LAYER_START_TIME
leaves the Physical Layer of source device
Specifies the time(microseconds) at which the packet
PHY_LAYER_END_TIME
reaches the Physical Layer of destination device
APP_LAYER_PAYLOAD Specifies the size of the Payload at Application Layer
TRX_LAYER_PAYLOAD Specifies the size of the Payload at Transport Layer
NW_LAYER_PAYLOAD Specifies the size of the Payload at Network Layer
MAC_LAYER_PAYLOAD Specifies the size of the Payload at Data Link Layer
PHY_LAYER_PAYLOAD Specifies the size of the Payload at Physical Layer
PHY_LAYER_OVERHEAD Specifies the size of the overhead in Physical layer
Specifies whether the Packet is Successful, Collided or
PACKET_STATUS
Errored
LOCAL_ADDRESS Specifies the Port Number at Source Node
FOREIGN_ADDRESS Specifies the Port Number at Destination Node
CWND Specifies the size of congestion window
If TCP is enabled, it specifies the TCP Sequence
SEQ_NO
number of the packet
If TCP is enabled, it specifies the TCP
ACK_NO
Acknowledgement number of the packet
RTT Specifies the Round Trip Time for the packet
RTO Specifies the Retransmission Timeouts
CONNECTION_STATE Specifies the state of TCP connection
CW Specifies the maximum size of contention window
BO_TIME Specifies the Backoff time (in microseconds)
In case of WLAN, it specifies the data rate at which the
DATARATE
packet was transmitted
Specifies the power(in dBm) required by the device at
RX_POWER
reception
Specifies the minimum magnitude (in dBm) of input
RX_SENSITIVITY
signal required to produce a specified output signal.

140
6.6 Event Trace (only in Standard/Pro Version)
NetSim Network Stack:

NetSims Network Stack forms the core of NetSim and its architectural aspects are
diagrammatically explained below. Network Stack accepts inputs from the end-user in the
form of Configuration file and the data flows as packets from one layer to another layer in the
Network Stack.

All packets, when transferred between devices move up and down the stack, and all events in
NetSim fall under one of these ten categories of events, namely, Physical IN, Data Link IN,
Network IN, Transport IN, Application IN, Application Out, Transport OUT, Network
OUT, Data Link OUT and Physical OUT. The IN events occur when the packets are entering
a device while the OUT events occur while the packet is leaving a device.

Every device in NetSim has an instance of the Network Stack shown above. Switches
& Access points have a 2 layer stack, while routers have a 3 layer stack. End-nodes have a 5
layer stack.
The protocol engines are called based on the layer at which the protocols operate. For
example, TCP is called during execution of Transport IN or Transport OUT events, while
802.11b WLAN is called during execution of MAC IN, MAC OUT, PHY IN and PHY OUT
events.

141
 When these protocols are in operation they in turn generate events for NetSim's
discrete event engine to process. These are known as SUB EVENTS. All SUB EVENTS, fall
into one of the above 10 types of EVENTS.

Each event gets added in the Simulation kernel by the protocol operating at the
particular layer of the Network Stack. The required sub events are passed into the Simulation
kernel. These sub events are then fetched by the Network Stack in order to execute the
functionality of each protocol. At the end of Simulation, Network Stack writes trace files and
the Metrics files that assist the user in analyzing the performance metrics and statistical
analysis.

Event Trace:

The event trace records every single event along with associated information such as
time stamp, event ID, event type etc in a text file or .csv file which can be stored at a user
defined location.

Apart from a host of information, the event trace has two special information fields
for diagnostics
a) A log of the file name and line number from where the event was generated (Please
refer Custom Code in NetSim Debugging your code Via CLI) and
b) Previous event which triggered the current event.

Note: Turning
NetSim provideson Event
users Trace
with will slow
the option down the
of turning onsimulation significantly
"Event Traces".

How to enable Event Trace via GUI?

If NetSim runs via GUI, event trace can be turned on by clicking the Event Trace icon
in the tool bar in the Internetworks menu and selecting the required fields in the event trace.

How to enable Event Trace via CLI?

If NetSim runs via CLI, then the event trace can be turned on by enabling the event
trace in the STATISTICS_COLLECTION tag of the configuration file.

142
How to import Event Trace to Excel?

Refer Help on Generating Packet Trace How to import Packet Trace to Excel?

Event Trace Metrics:

Event_Id Specifies the ID of the Event
Specifies the type of event being performed, for eg -
Event_Type APPLICATION_IN, APPLICATION_OUT, MAC_OUT, MAC_IN,
PHYSICAL_OUT, PHYSICAL_IN,etc
Event_Time Specifies the time(in microseconds) at which the event is being executed
Device_Type Specifies the type of device in which the current event is being executed
Device_Id Specifies the ID of device in which the current event is being executed
Specifies the Interface_Id of device in which the present event is being
Interface_Id
executed.
Specifies the ID of the Application on which the specific event is
Application_Id
executed
Specifies the ID of the packet on which the current event is being
Packet_Id
executed
Specifies the ID of the segment of packet on which the current event is
Segment_Id
being executed
Protocol_Name Specifies the Protocol which is presently executed
Specifies the protocol sub event which is being executed. If the sub event
Subevent_Type value is 0, it indicates interlayer communication (Ex: MAC_OUT called
by NETWORK_OUT) or a TIMER_EVENT which has no sub event.
Packet_Size Specifies the size of packet during the current event
Prev_Event_Id Specifies the ID of the event which generated the current event.

143
6.7 Trace Data Analysis (only in Standard/Pro Version)
This section explains about how to analyze the data of a NetSim trace file.

How to set filters to NetSim trace file

Step 1: Open the trace file. (In this example packet trace is opened)

Step 2: Go to Data menu and click on filter icon to enable the auto filter.

Step 3: Click the arrow in the header of the column you want to filter. In the list of text or
numbers, uncheck the (Select All) box at the top of the list, and then check the boxes of the
items you want to show.

For example, click on arrow of SOURCE_ID and uncheck the Select all check box and
select NODE 2 then click on ok.

All the rows which are having NODE 2 as source id will be shown.

144
Typically filters can be set to observe Errored/Collided/Successful packets, packets of
destination and packets of source.

Observing packet flow in the Network through packet trace file

Step 1: Open the packet trace file.

Step 2: Set the filter.

Step 3: Click the arrow in the header of the column PACKET_ID and uncheck the
Select all check box and select the packet id which you want to observe, for example 1, and
then click on ok.

145
Scenario is as shown below and traffic flow is from Wired Node 1 to Wired Node 2.

Flow of packet 1 can be observed from the packet trace as shown below.

Note: In the trace file device IDs are shown not device names. Wired Node 1s ID is 2 so it is
Shown as NODE-2, Wired Node 2s ID is 3 so it is shown as NODE -3, Router-1 ID is 1 so it
is shown as ROUTER-1. Device IDs are shown on the top of the device icon in the above
scenario.

In a scenario source and destinations are fixed but transmitter and receiver are changed. For
example in the above scenario NODE-2 is the source and NODE-3 is the destination, but
when NODE- 2 sending the packet to the ROUTER-1 then NODE-2 is the transmitter and
ROUTER-1 is the receiver. When ROUTER-1 sending the packet to the NODE-3, ROUTER-
1 is the transmitter and NODE-3 is the receiver.

146
6.8 Packet Capture & analysis using Wireshark
(www.wireshark.com) (only in Standard/Pro Version)
6.8.1 Enabling Wireshark in the network scenario

In NetSim, to enable packet capture in Wireshark, Right Click on the device where
Wireshark will capture packets. In the properties, go to Global_Properties and set the
Wireshark parameter as Online

6.8.2 Viewing captured packets

If enabled, Wireshark automatically starts during simulation and displays all the captured
packets.
To view the details of the packet displayed, click on the packet as shown below:

147
The detail of the contents of the selected packet can be seen in the below panes.

TREE View

BYTE View

In the above figure, the details of the packet are displayed in both tree form and bytes form.
In the tree form, user can expand the data by clicking on the part of the tree and view
detailed information about each protocol in each packet.

6.8.3 Filtering captured packets

Display filters allow you to concentrate on the packets you are interested in while hiding
the currently uninteresting ones. Packets can be filtered by protocol, presence of a field,
values of fields etc.
To select packets based on protocol, type the protocol in which you are interested in the
Filter: field of the Wireshark window and press enter to initiate the filter. In the figure
below, tcp protocol is filtered.

You can also build display filters that compare values using a number of different
comparison operators like ==, != , >, <, <=, etc.

Following is an example displaying filtered packets whose SYN Flag and ACK Flag are
set to 1 in a TCP Stream.

148
6.8.4 Analyzing packets in Wireshark
6.8.4.1 Analyzing Conversation using graphs

A network conversation is the traffic between

two specific endpoints. For example, an IP
conversation is all the traffic between two IP
addresses.

In Wireshark,
go to Statistics Menu Conversations

Different types of protocols will be available. User can select the specific conversation by
going to the desired protocol. For example, in the following diagram, we have selected TCP.

User can also analyze each of the conversation and can create graphs by selecting them and
clicking on Graph

149
The different types of graphs possible are
Round Trip time
Throughput
Time/Sequence (Stevens)
Time/Sequence (tcptrace)
Window Scaling

150
6.8.4.2 Comparing the packet lengths

To analyze the packet sizes of all packets transmitted,

go to Statistics MenuPacket lengths .

Users can also set filter to analyze a collection of

specific packets only. For example, tcp filter is set to
obtain the packet length below:

6.8.4.3 Creating IO graphs

To get the graph, go to Statistics Menu IO Graph.

151
6.8.4.4 Creating Flow graphs

The flow graph feature provides a quick and easy to use

way of checking connections between a client and a server.
It can show where there might be issues with a TCP
connection, such as timeouts, re-transmitted frames, or
dropped connections.

To access flow graph, go to Statistics Menu Flow Graph

and select the flow type.

By default you can see the flow graph of all the packets.

To get the TCP flow, select TCP flow in Flow Type dropdown box and you will obtain the
flow as shown:

152
153
7 Custom code in NetSim
7.1 Writing your own code
NetSim allows the user to write the custom code for all the protocols by creating a DLL
(Dynamic Link Library) for their custom code and replacing NetSims default DLL with the
users custom DLL.

There are various important steps in this process, and each of these steps has various options
as explained in the subsequent pages:

7.1.1 Modifying code

DLL is the shared library concept, implemented by Microsoft. All DLL files have a .dll file
extension. DLLs provide a mechanism for sharing code and data to upgrade functionality
without requiring applications to be re-linked or re-compiled. It is not possible to directly
execute a DLL, since it requires an EXE for the operating system to load it through an entry
point.

Note: If the DLL needs to be debugged then build the DLL in debug mode or else build in
release mode.

Dynamic link libraries (DLLs) can be built using different compilers:

(a) Using Microsoft Visual Studio Compiler

a) Compiler: Microsoft Visual Studio

To create the DLL follow the steps given below.

Note: Make sure that Visual Studio 2010 is installed in your computer

Step 1: Go to ../NetSim Standard/src/Simulation folder and double click on

NetSim.sln file to open the solution in visual studio.

Note: It is recommended to keep a separate copy of the ../NetSim

Standard/src/Simulation folder to have the backup of the original source code.

154
 b)

Note: Sometimes you may get the following warning message. Then click on ok
and proceed.

Step 2: Inside Solution Explorer pane in Visual Studio 2010, double click on DSR. Then
open DSR.C file by double clicking on it.

Step 3: Add fprintf (stderr, Source is modified\n); statement inside the source code of
DSR as shown below to print Source is modified.

155
 Note: - Use fprintf (stderr,Hello World) instead of printf ( ) to write to standard out.
stdout is redirected to LogFile.txt which is present in <iopath>. So you can see Hello
World Statement (or whatever you write inside the printf) inside the LogFile.txt.

Once this is done click to save the changes and overwrite the file (in case of write
protection).

7.1.2 Building Dlls

Step 1: Right Click on the Project (in this case DSR) inside the Solution Explorer pane and
select Build to create DLL file of that specific protocol only

NOTE: To create DLL file of all the protocols actively displayed inside solution pane, click
on BuildBuild Solution

156
Check that the build is successful and necessary DLL files have been built.

Step 2: Inside the simulation folder (present on the desktop) a Dll folder will be created and
inside, the DLLs are built.

It will contain custom DLLs which have been built per the modifications done.

157
7.1.3 Linking Dlls

The procedure to link custom dynamic link libraries (DLLs) is explained below. This
procedure is common for any linking of any custom DLL to NetSim.

Now we will link the customized libDSR.dll to the NetSim.

Step 1: Copy the newly created DLL file of customized DSR from ../NetSim
Standard/src/Simulation folder

Step 2: Go to NetSim Standardbin folder. Here one would find default DLLs for
respective protocols as shown in next figure.

Step 3: Rename the default DLL: It is recommended to rename the default DLL thereby
saving a copy of original DLL. For example libCognitiveRadio.dll has been renamed as
libCognitiveRadio_default.dll as shown below.

Original DLL

Original DLL has been renamed

158
Step 4: Place the custom DLL obtained from Step 1 inside the NetSim Standard bin
folder.

Custom (your) DLL

Note: Ensure that the name of the DLL which is pasted is exactly the same as
the original DLL (before it was renamed). For the example case of DSR, the DLL
must be libDSR.dll.

7.1.4 Running Simulation

User can run the simulation via GUI (Please refer section 3). Running the simulation with the
custom DLL will give desired output to the user as shown below.

Press enter then simulation will continue.

159
7.2 Implementing your code - Examples
7.2.1 Hello World Program

Objective: Print Hello World from DSR protocol.

Implementation: Add fprintf (stderr, <MESSAGE>) statement inside the source code of
DSR as shown below to print Hello World when custom built dll is executing.

Note: - Use fprintf (stderr,Hello World) instead of printf ( ) to write to standard out.
stdout is redirected to LogFile.txt which is present in <iopath>. So you can see Hello
World Statement (or whatever you write inside the printf) inside the LogFile.txt.

Create DLL and Link the DLL to the NetSim as explained in Section 7.1. And run the
simulation, you can see the following output on the console.

Press enter then simulation will continue.

160
7.2.2 Introducing Node Failure in MANET

Objective: Node failure using MANET-DSR using Device Id.

Implementation: Identify the Device ID of the particular node to be failed.

Step 1: Create a file with the name NodeFailure.txt inside the bin folder of NetSim
installation directory. The file will contain two columns: one being the Node ID of the device
to be failed and other being the failure time (in microseconds).
For example, to fail Node Id 2 from 10th sec onwards and fail Node Id 1 from 90th sec
onwards, the NodeFailure.txt file will be as follows:

Step 2: Go to DSR.c in DSR protocol.

Step 3: The function fn_NetSim_DSR_Init() will execute before the protocol execution
starts. So in this function, we will read the NodeFailure.txt and save information regarding
which nodes will fail at which time. Add the following code inside the specified function.

int i;
FILE *fp1;
char *pszFilepath;
char pszConfigInput[1000];
pszFilepath = fnpAllocateMemory(36,sizeof(char)*50);
strcpy(pszFilepath,pszAppPath);
strcat(pszFilepath,"/NodeFailure.txt");
fp1 = fopen(pszFilepath,"r");
i=0;
if(fp1)
{
while(fgets(pszConfigInput,500,fp1)!= NULL)
{
sscanf(pszConfigInput,"%d %d",&NodeArray[i],&TimeArray[i]);
i+=1;
}
}
fclose(fp1);

161
Step 4: The fn_NetSim_DSR_Run( ) is the main function to handle all the protocol
functionalities. So add the following code to the function at the start.
int i,nFlag=1;
if(nFlag)
{
for(i=0;i<100;i++)
if((pstruEventDetails->nDeviceId== NodeArray[i])&&(pstruEventDetails-
>dEventTime >= TimeArray[i]))
{
pstruEventDetails->nInterfaceId = 0;
pstruEventDetails->pPacket=NULL;
return 0;
}
}

Step 5: Add the following code inside DSR.h header file

//Node failure model
int NodeArray[200];
int TimeArray[200];

Step 6: Create DLL and Link the DLL to the NetSim as explained in Section 7.1.

Step 7: Create a scenario in MANET and run the simulation. User can utilize Packet
Animation to check the node failure (i.e. no packets are forwarded by failed nodes) after the
mentioned time.

162
7.2.3 Transferring file from source to destination in WSN

Objective: Transferring a real file from source node to destination node in WSN

Implementation: The code modifications to transfer file from Sensor to Sink node are
described here:
1. Open NetSim.sln in Visual Studio and add the following modifications.
2. The modified files are in Zigbee: Sensor.c and 802_15_4.h
3. In 802_15_4.h add the following line of code
#define _FILE_SEND_ //Uncomment to transfer file

4. In Sensor.c , the code must be modified at specified places in red color. Add the
modified code:
#include "main.h"
#include "List.h"
#include "802_15_4.h"
#define MAX_PAYLOAD 70

int fn_NetSim_FindAgentPos(double* dXPos, double* dYPos, int nAgentId,double

dSensingTime,AGENT** pstruAgent);
double fn_Sensor_CalculateDistance(POS_2D* pstruPos1, POS_2D* pstruPos2);

#ifdef _FILE_SEND_
typedef struct file_info
{
char Packet[100];
long len;
int Packet_Id;
_ele* ele;
}FILE_INFO,*PFILE_INFO;
#define FILE_INFO_ALLOC()
(PFILE_INFO)list_alloc(sizeof(FILE_INFO),offsetof(FILE_INFO,ele))
PFILE_INFO fileinfo=NULL;
static int nPacketId=0;
char file_name[100][50] = {"send.txt"};
char outfile_name[100][50] = {"receive.txt"};

int fnWriteFile(int PacketId)

{
char *packet;
static FILE *file_receive=NULL;
PFILE_INFO file_rec=fileinfo;
size_t siz;

if(!file_receive)
file_receive = fopen(outfile_name[0],"wb");

163
 while(file_rec)
{
if(file_rec->Packet_Id == PacketId)
{
//fprintf(stderr,"file written. size = %d\n",file_rec-
>len);
packet = file_rec->Packet;
siz = file_rec->len;
fwrite(packet,sizeof(char),siz,file_receive);
}
file_rec=LIST_NEXT(file_rec);
}
fflush(file_receive);
return 0;
}

int fnsendfile(NETSIM_ID nSensorLoop)

{
NetSim_PACKET *PstruPacket;
FILE *file_transfer;
size_t siz;
long file_size;
long n;
PFILE_INFO file;

if(file_name[nSensorLoop-1] && *file_name[nSensorLoop-1])

file_transfer = fopen(file_name[nSensorLoop-1],"rb");
else
return -1;
if(!file_transfer)
{
perror(file_name[nSensorLoop-1]);
return -1;
}
fseek(file_transfer,0,SEEK_END);
file_size = ftell(file_transfer);
rewind(file_transfer);
n = file_size;
while(n>0)
{
char str[MAX_PAYLOAD+10];
fprintf(stderr,"Size left = %d\n",n);
if(n>=MAX_PAYLOAD)
{
siz = fread(str,sizeof(char),MAX_PAYLOAD,file_transfer);

}
else
{
siz = fread(str,sizeof(char),n,file_transfer);
}
n-=siz;

//Add application out to tramit the position

//Generate the packet
PstruPacket = fn_NetSim_Packet_CreatePacket(5);
PstruPacket->dEventTime = pstruEventDetails->dEventTime;

164
 PstruPacket->nDestinationId = nGlobalPANCoordinatorId;
PstruPacket->nPacketId = ++nPacketId;
PstruPacket->nPacketStatus = 0;
PstruPacket->nPacketType = PacketType_Custom;
PstruPacket->nPacketPriority = Priority_Low;
PstruPacket->nQOS =(NETSIM_ID)QOS_BE;
PstruPacket->nSourceId = (NETSIM_ID)nSensorLoop;
//Update the Transport layer information
PstruPacket->pstruTransportData->nSourcePort = SOURCEPORT;
PstruPacket->pstruTransportData->nDestinationPort =
DESTINATIONPORT;
//Update the Network layer information
PstruPacket->pstruNetworkData->szSourceIP =
IP_COPY(fn_NetSim_Stack_GetFirstIPAddressAsId((NETSIM_ID)nSensorLoop,0));
PstruPacket->pstruNetworkData->szDestIP =
IP_COPY(fn_NetSim_Stack_GetFirstIPAddressAsId(PstruPacket-
>nDestinationId,0));
PstruPacket->pstruNetworkData->nTTL = MAX_TTL;
//Update the Application layer information
//For transferring file from Sensor to sink node
//70 bytes at a time
file =FILE_INFO_ALLOC();
memcpy(file->Packet,str,siz);
file->Packet_Id = PstruPacket->nPacketId;
file->len = siz;
LIST_ADD_LAST((void**)&fileinfo,file);

PstruPacket->szPayload = NULL;
PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dPayload = siz;
PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dOverhead = 0;
PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dPacketSize = PstruPacket-
>pstruAppData->dPayload + PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dOverhead;

PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dArrivalTime = pstruEventDetails-
>dEventTime;
PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dEndTime = pstruEventDetails-
>dEventTime;
PstruPacket->pstruAppData->dStartTime = pstruEventDetails-
>dEventTime;

if(NETWORK->ppstruDeviceList[nSensorLoop-1]-
>pstruTransportLayer->isUDP)
PstruPacket->pstruTransportData-
>nTransportProtocol=TX_PROTOCOL_UDP;
else if(NETWORK->ppstruDeviceList[nSensorLoop-1]-
>pstruTransportLayer->isTCP)
PstruPacket->pstruTransportData-
>nTransportProtocol=TX_PROTOCOL_TCP;
else
PstruPacket->pstruTransportData->nTransportProtocol=0;
if(NETWORK->ppstruDeviceList[nSensorLoop-1]-
>pstruSocketInterface->pstruSocketBuffer[0]->pstruPacketlist==NULL)
{
fn_NetSim_Packet_AddPacketToList((NETWORK-
>ppstruDeviceList[nSensorLoop-1]->pstruSocketInterface-
>pstruSocketBuffer[0]),PstruPacket,3);

165
 pstruEventDetails->dPacketSize=PstruPacket-
>pstruAppData->dPacketSize;
pstruEventDetails->nDeviceType = SENSOR;
pstruEventDetails->nApplicationId=0;
pstruEventDetails->nProtocolId=PstruPacket-
>pstruTransportData->nTransportProtocol;
pstruEventDetails->nDeviceId=(NETSIM_ID)nSensorLoop;
pstruEventDetails->nInterfaceId=0;
pstruEventDetails->nEventType=TRANSPORT_OUT_EVENT;
pstruEventDetails->nSubEventType=0;
pstruEventDetails->pPacket=NULL;
fnpAddEvent(pstruEventDetails);
}
else
{
fn_NetSim_Packet_AddPacketToList((NETWORK-
>ppstruDeviceList[nSensorLoop-1]->pstruSocketInterface-
>pstruSocketBuffer[0]),PstruPacket,3);
}
}
fclose(file_transfer);
return 0;
}
#endif
/** In this function the sensors sense the agent, creates a packet and
forwards it to sink node.*/
int fn_NetSim_Zigbee_SensorEvent(int nSensorLoop,NETSIM_ID
nGlobalPANCoordinatorId,AGENT** pstruAgent,SENSORS* pstru_Sensor,METRICS**
pstruMetrics,NetSim_EVENTDETAILS* pstruEventDetails)
{
int nFlag = 0;
static int nPacketId;
char str[500];
int nAgentLoop;
POS_2D* pstruPos;
double dDistance;
POS_2D* pstruTemppos;
NetSim_PACKET *PstruPacket;

#ifdef _FILE_SEND_
fnsendfile((NETSIM_ID)nSensorLoop);
return 0;
#endif
pstruPos = (POS_2D*)fnpAllocateMemory(sizeof(POS_2D),1);
pstruTemppos = (POS_2D*)fnpAllocateMemory(sizeof(POS_2D),1);
for(nAgentLoop =0;nAgentLoop<MAXAGENT;nAgentLoop++)
{
if(pstruAgent[nAgentLoop] == NULL)
continue;

5. In 802_15_4.c , the code must be modified at specified places in red color. Add the
modified code:

case MAC_IN_EVENT:
{

166
 .

if(pstruPacket->nControlDataType/100 != MAC_PROTOCOL_IEEE802_15_4)
{
//Prepare the Network in event details
pstruPacket->pstruMacData->dOverhead -= 5;
pstruPacket->pstruMacData->dPacketSize = pstruPacket-
>pstruMacData->dPayload + pstruPacket->pstruMacData->dOverhead;
pstruEventDetails->dPacketSize = pstruPacket->pstruMacData-
>dPacketSize;
pstruEventDetails->pPacket = pstruPacket;
pstruEventDetails->nEventType = NETWORK_IN_EVENT;
pstruEventDetails->nSubEventType = 0;
pstruEventDetails->nProtocolId =
fn_NetSim_Stack_GetNWProtocol(pstruEventDetails->nDeviceId);
//Add Network in event
fnpAddEvent(pstruEventDetails);
#ifdef _FILE_SEND_
if(pstruPacket->nPacketType == PacketType_Custom)
fnWriteFile(pstruPacket->nSourceId,pstruPacket->nPacketId);
#endif
}
else if(pstruPacket->nControlDataType == BEACON_FRAME)
{ ...

6. Copy the input file (file to be transferred) in NetSim bin folder (C:\Program
Files\NetSim Standard\bin) and rename it as send.txt.
7. In Sensor.c, user can optionally edit the name of the input file in file_name[] and
output file in outfile_name[] in the code. For example, currently it is receive.txt for
output file.
8. Build Zigbee (Please refer section 7.1) and link the dll to bin folder of NetSim. Take
care to rename the original libZigbee.dll so as to preserve the original binaries of
NetSim
9. Next, to run the code, follow these steps:

In this section we create a sample scenario to transfer file from Sensor to Sink Node in WSN:

Step 1: Create a scenario in NetSim as follows. Make sure the

sensor is dropped first on the environment

Step 2: Run the simulation. (Make sure the input file to be

transferred is present in bin folder of NetSim).

167
Step 3: Output file should be present in bin folder of NetSim with
the name receive.txt defined earlier in outfile_name[] in Sensor.c.

Note: Due to retransmissions and errors, sometimes the output file is not reproduced
correctly. To get exact file, user has to enable TCP (WSN works on UDP).

7.3 Debugging your code

This section is helpful to debug the code which user has written. To write your own code
please refer Section 7.1

7.3.1 Via GUI

Step 1:- Perform the required modification of the protocol source code. Also add getch()
statement inside init function of the modified protocol.

Step 2:- Build the protocol and replace the dll in bin folder in NetSim. Do not close Visual
Studio.

Step 3:- In NetSim, create a network scenario where the protocol is being used. The
simulation wont start and will pause (because of getch())

168
Step 4:- In Visual Studio, put break point inside the source code where you want to debug.

Step 5:- Go to Debug Attach to Process in Visual studio as shown and attach to
NetSimCore.exe.

169
Click on Attach.

Press enter in the command window .Then control goes to the project and stops at the break
point in the source code as shown below.

All debugging options like step over (F10), step into (F11), step out (Shift + F11),
continue (F5) are available.

After execution of the function, the control goes back to NetSim and then comes back to the
custom code the next time the function is called in the simulation.

170
To stop debugging and continue execution, remove all breakpoint and press F5 (key). This
then gives the control back to NetSim, for normal execution to continue.

7.3.2 Via CLI and co-relating with event trace

Step 1:- Open the Command prompt.

Press windows+R and type cmd.

Step 2:- To run the NetSim via CLI copy the path where NetSimCore.exe is present.

>cd <apppath>

Step 3:- Type the following command.

>NetSimCore.exe<space> -apppath<space><app path><space>-iopath<space><io

path><space>-license<space>5053@<Server IP Address> -d

171
Press enter. Now you can see the following screen.

Step 4:- Open/Create the Project in Visual Studio and put break point inside the source code.

Step 5:- Go to Debug Attach to Process

Attach to NetSimCore.exe.

172
Click on Attach.

Step 6:- Go to command prompt which is already opened in Step 3. Enter the Event Id.

Note: If you dont want to stop at any event you can specify 0 as event id.

Execution will stop at the specified event.

173
Press enter then control goes to the project and stops at the break point in the source code as
shown below.

All debugging options like step over (F10), step into (F11), step out (Shift + F11),
continue(F5) are available.

After execution of the function, the control goes back to NetSim and then comes back to the
custom code the next time the function is called in the simulation.

To stop debugging and continue execution, remove all breakpoint and press F5 (key). This
then gives the control back to NetSim, for normal execution to continue.

Co-relating with Event Generated

To debug your own (custom) code, it is often helpful to know which section of the code (file
name & line number) generated the event under study. There are 2 ways to enable this
feature.
174
Procedure 1

Step 1: Open configuration.xml file and provide the file name, path and set status as Enable.

Step 2: Run the NetSim via CLI in debug mode (Refer NetSim Help Running Netsim via
CLI) with d as the fourth parameters

Press enter

Step 3: Enter -1 as the event ID

Upon running, NetSim will write the file name and line number of the source code that
generated each event.

175
Note: In the above trace file Event Id 2 is triggered inside the 802_22_lib.c file which is
present in Cognitive radio.lib.Since all the lib files are opaque to the end user, you cannot see
the source code of the lib file. However, Event Id 4 is triggered at line number 80 of sch.c file
and you can find the location of the event by opening the sch.c file as shown below.
File name

Line number

Procedure 2:

176
Step 1: Right click on my computer and select Properties.

Step 2: Go to Advanced System setting Advanced

Tab Environment Variables

Step 3: Click New. Type NETSIM_BREAK as

Variable name and any negative integer as Variable
value. Click OK.

Step 4: Now perform simulation in NetSim . Upon running, NetSim will write the file name
and line number of the source code that generated each event.

7.3.3 Viewing & Accessing variables

Viewing variables while debugging code -

177
 To see the value of a variable, when debugging hover the mouse over the variable
name in the code. A text box with variable contents appears. If the variable is a structure and
contains other variables, then click on the plus sign which is there to the left of the text box.
Users can pin the variable to watch by clicking on the pin icon to the right of that variable in
the text box.

Adding the variable to watch -

Watch the change in the variable as the code progress by right clicking on the variable
& clicking on "add watch" tab. This is useful if to continuously monitor the change in the
variable as the code progresses.

Viewing external variables -

During the process of debug users would come across variables that are defined

178
outside the source file being built as a .dll. Such variables cannot be viewed directly when
added in the watch tab, as this would throw the error
CX0017: Error:symbol Variable_Namenot found.

In the call stack window one can find the file in which that variable is situated. Right
click on the dll file name in the call stack window, in this case NetworkStack.dll. Then in the
pull down menu which appears, select "load symbols from" and give the path of the
pdb(program database) file.
A program database (.pdb) file, also called a symbol file, maps the identifiers that a
user creates in source files for classes, methods, and other code to the identifiers that are used
in the compiled executablesof the project. The .pdb file also maps the statements in the
source code to the execution instructions in the executables. The debugger uses this
information to determine: the source file and the line number displayed in the Visual Studio
IDE and the location in the executable to stop at when a user sets a breakpoint. A symbol file
also contains the original location of the source files, and optionally, the location of a source
server where the source files can be retrieved from.
When a user debugs a project in the Visual Studio IDE, the debugger knows exactly
where to find the .pdb and source files for the code. If the user wants to debug code outside
their project source code, such as the Windows or third-party code the project calls, the user
has to specify the location of the .pdb (and optionally, the source files of the external code)
and those files need to exactly match the build of the executables.

The pdb files are usually available in NetSims install directory, else write to
[email protected] for the latest copy of these debug files.

179
Note: If the load symbols menu option is greyed, then it means symbols are already loaded

In the watch window, the variable which the user has to watch should be edited by
double clicking on it and prefixing {,,NetworkStack.dll} to the variable name and pressing
enter. (The name of the respective file in which the variable is defined should be mentioned -
in this case NetworkStack.dll).

Prefixing to the variable name

180
Accessing External Variables

In NetSim, while a scenario is simulated, it is possible to access variables which are

defined in one .dll file from another .dll file. An example is given below showing how a
WLAN file variable dTotalReceivedPower can be accessed in the DSR file.

The user must modify the files present in <Installed Directory>\src\Simulation as

specified below.

The variable dTotalReceivedPower is defined in a structure PHY_VAR. So the user

will have to access a pointer of type PHY_VAR. In the header file where the structure
definition is given, the following line of code must be written
_declspec(dllexport) PHY_VAR *var1;
In the example, the code line must be written in WLAN.h file present inside WLAN folder.

In the main function where a user wishes to find the dTotalReceivedPower, the variable must
be assigned the respective value. In the above case, the following line of code must be written
inside fn_NetSim_WLAN_PhysicalIn() function in WLAN.c file present inside WLAN
folder
var1 = DEVICE_PHYVAR(nDeviceId, nInterfaceId);
Note that the parameters given in the macro or any function which assigns a value to
the variable must be defined beforehand in the code. Here nDeviceId and nInterfaceId are
defined beforehand.

181
 The solution must be built and the resulting <Installed Directory>\src\Simulation
\Dll\libWLAN.dll file which gets created must be copied in to the NetSim standard bin
folder.

The modified WLAN.h file along with other header files on which it depends (802_11e.h and
802_11abgnac.h), present inside <Installed Directory> \src \Simulation \WLAN\ folder must
be copied and pasted in the DSR solution folder <Installed Directory>\src\Simulation\DSR
and must be included in the DSR solution in visual studio.

182
 The Object file library <Installed Directory>\src\Simulation \Dll\WLAN.lib file
which got created must be copied and pasted in the lib folder located at <Installed
Directory>\src\Simulation.

The WLAN.h header file which was included in DSR solution must be edited and the
line where _declspec(dllexport) PHY_VAR *var1; was written must be replaced with
_declspec(dllimport) PHY_VAR *var1;

For viewing the variable value in the command prompt, the following lines must be
added in DSR.c.
#include WLAN.h
if(var1)
fprintf (stderr,"\n Received Power- %lf\n",var1->dTotalReceivedPower);
183
 The solution must be built and the resulting dll file <Installed
Directory>\src\Simulation \Dll\libDSR.dll must be copied and replaced in the NetSim
Standard bin path. When a scenario is run, the Total Received Power can be seen in the
command prompt.

184
7.4 NetSim APIs
NetSim provides a wide variety of APIs for protocol developers. These are available in
1. packet.h Packet related APIs (Eg: Create_Packet ( ), Copy_Packet ( ), Free_Packet (
) etc.)
2. stack.h Network / device / link and event related APIs (Eg: Get_Device_IP ( ),
Get_Connected_Link( ), Add_Event ( ) etc.)
3. list.h, -- Optimized list operation calls since NetSim uses lists extensively (Eg:
Add_to_list ( ), Sort_list ( ) etc.)
4. NetSim_Graph.h This is used for plotting graphs using GNU plot
5. IP_Addressing.h For setting & getting IP address per the appropriate format (Eg:
Convert_IP_to_string ( ), Compare_IP( ) etc.)

For detailed help please refer the appropriateheader (.h) files inside:
../NetSim_Standard/src/simulation/include or read through the doxygen source code
documentation available inside NetSim Help NetSim source code Help
Include all the header (.h) files from the include folder
NetworkStack.lib is a import library file and has the definitions for the functions
present in the NetworkStack.dll
When developing new protocols users should create their own protocol.h and declare
all the protocol specific variables here. Stack & packet related variables should be
used from stack.h and packet.h

NetSim Network Stack calling individual Protocol

Every protocol should provide the following APIs as hooks to the network stack:
int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_init)(conststruct stru_NetSim_Network*,conststruct
stru_NetSim_EventDetails*,constchar*,constchar*,int,constvoid**);
Using this API the stack passes all the relevant pointers to variables, paths etc needed for
the protocol. Inside this function a) local variables should be initialized, b) Initial events if
any should be written,eg: Hello packet in RIP, STP in Ethernet c) File pointers for
reading & writing protocol_specific_IO files.
int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_Configure)( conststruct stru_NetSim_Network*, int
nDeviceId, int nINterfaceID, int nlayertype, fnpAllocateMemory, fnpFreeMemory,
fpConfigLog );

185
 The stack calls this API when reading the config file. Upon reaching the appropriate
protocol definition in the XML file, the stack calls this and passes all these pointers to the
protocol

int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_run)(): This is called by the stack to run the protocol

char* (*fn_NetSim_protocol_trace)(int): This called by the stack to write the event trace

int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_CopyPacket)(const NetSim_PACKET* pstruDestPacket,const

NetSim_PACKET* pstruSrcPacket):
This is for copying protocol specific parameters / data into the packed

int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_FreePacket)(const NetSim_PACKET* pstruPacket): The this

to free the protocol specific parameters / data in the packet

(*fn_NetSim_protocol_Metrics)(const FILE* fpMetrics): This is to write the metrics file

upon completion of the simulation

int (*fn_NetSim_protocol_Finish)(): To release all memory after completion

char* (*fn_NetSim_protocol_ConfigPacketTrace)(constvoid* xmlNetSimNode); To

configure the packet packet trace in terms of the parameters to be logged

char* (*fn_NetSim_protocol_WritePacketTrace)(const NetSim_PACKET*); To

configure the event trace in terms of the parameters to be logged

186
8 Advanced Features
8.1 Random number Generator and Seed Values
All network simulations involve an element of randomness. Some examples are -
a. It is possible to configure the traffic sources in the simulation to generate traffic in a
perfectly regular pattern. However, this is typically not the case in the real world.
b. Node back-offs after collisions are random to resolve contention issues
c. The exact bit which is errored, based on Bit error probability of a wireless channel, is
decided randomly

NetSim uses an in-built Linear Congruential Random Number Generator (RNG) to generate
the randomness. The RNG uses two seeds values to initialize the RNG.

Having the same set of seed values ensures that for a particular network configuration the
same output results will be got, irrespective of the PC or the time at which the simulation is
run. This ensures repeatability of experimentation.

Modifying the seed value will lead to the generation of a different set of random numbers and
thereby lead to a different sequence of events in NetSim. When simulations are run for a
network configuration with different seed values, the results will likely be slightly different.

More advanced users may note that Confidence can be established by analyzing a set of
results with different seed values for the same network scenario.

187
8.2 Static Routing
How to Setup Static Routes in RIP and OSPF

Using GUI

Step1: Create a scenario in internetworks and set properties of the devices. Configure the
applications.

Step 2: While running the simulation, go to IP and ARP configuration tab and enable Static
IP forwarding and browse the path where it has to be saved.

Using CLI

Step1: In internetworks, Static Routes can be set for any scenario having a minimum of 3
routers, 2 switches and 3 wired nodes. The easiest way to do this is to first run the scenario
with routing protocol set as RIP/OSPF and save the Configuration file

Step 2: Open the Configuration file with Visual studio. Expand the Router configuration and
set the Static Routing information in Application Layer property of the device, by enabling
the Static routing status. Then set the appropriate Static routing file name and file path.

RIP

By default:
<LAYERTYPE="APPLICATION_LAYER">
<ROUTING_PROTOCOLNAME="RIP"SETPROPERTY="true">

188
<PROTOCOL_PROPERTYFILE_NAME="StaticRouting.txt"FILE_PATH="C:\Program
Files\NetSim
standard\Docs\Sample_Configuration\Internetworks"GARBAGE_COLLECTION_TIMER="
120"STATIC_ROUTING_STATUS="DISABLE"TIMEOUT_TIMER="180"UPDATE_TIMER="30"VERS
ION="2"/>
</ROUTING_PROTOCOL>
</LAYER>
Change to:
<LAYERTYPE="APPLICATION_LAYER">
<ROUTING_PROTOCOLNAME="RIP"SETPROPERTY="true">
<PROTOCOL_PROPERTYFILE_NAME="StaticRouting.txt"FILE_PATH="C:\Program
Files\NetSim
standard\Docs\Sample_Configuration\Internetworks"GARBAGE_COLLECTION_TIMER="
120"STATIC_ROUTING_STATUS="ENABLE"TIMEOUT_TIMER="180"UPDATE_TIMER="30"VERSI
ON="2"/>
</ROUTING_PROTOCOL>
</LAYER>

OSPF

By default:
<LAYERTYPE="APPLICATION_LAYER">
<ROUTING_PROTOCOLNAME="OSPF"SETPROPERTY="true">
<PROTOCOL_PROPERTYFILE_NAME="StaticRouting.txt"FILE_PATH="C:\Program
Files\NetSim standard\Docs\Sample_Configuration\Internetworks"
LS_REFRESH_TIME="1800"MAX_AGE="3600"ROUTER_PRIORITY="1"STATIC_ROUTING_STATU
S="DISABLE"VERSION="2"/>
</ROUTING_PROTOCOL>
</LAYER>
Change to:
<LAYERTYPE="APPLICATION_LAYER">
<ROUTING_PROTOCOLNAME="OSPF"SETPROPERTY="true">
<PROTOCOL_PROPERTYFILE_NAME="StaticRouting.txt"FILE_PATH="C:\Program
Files\NetSim standard\Docs\Sample_Configuration\Internetworks"
LS_REFRESH_TIME="1800"MAX_AGE="3600"ROUTER_PRIORITY="1"STATIC_ROUTING_STATU
S="ENABLE"VERSION="2"/>
</ROUTING_PROTOCOL>
</LAYER>

189
Note:

1. Update this information in any one of the router

2. A sample StaticRouting.txt file will be available inside C:\Program Files\NetSim

standard\Docs\Sample_Configuration\Internetworks. Appropriately modify it for the
scenario.

The StaticRouting.txt file contains

1. Device Id

2. List of entries to add in the routing table

DEVICE_ID:1

ROUTE ADD 192.168.0.0 MASK 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.1 METRICS 1 IF 1

ROUTE ADD 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1 METRICS 1 IF 2

DEVICE_ID:2

ROUTE ADD 192.168.2.0 MASK 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.1 METRICS 1 IF 1

ROUTE ADD 192.168.3.0 MASK 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.1 METRICS 1 IF 2

ROUTE ADD dest_ip MASK subnet_mask gateway_ip METRICS metric_value IF Interface_Id

1. The ROUTE ADD command to add the static route

2. The dest_ip is the Network address for the destination network
3. The MASK is the Subnet mask for the destination network
4. The gateway_ip is the IP address of the next-hop router
5. The METRICS is the value used to choose between two routes
6. The IF is the Interface to which the gateway_ip is connected. The default is 1.

Step 3: After this, run this configuration file through CLI and static routes will be used for
routing.

190
8.3 File Based Mobility
Mobility models represent the movement of mobile user, and how their location, velocity and
acceleration change over time. Such models are frequently used for simulation purposes
when new communication or navigation techniques are investigated, or to evaluate the
performance of mobile wireless systems and the algorithms and protocols at the basis of
them.

In File Based Mobility, users can write their own custom mobility models and define the
movement of the mobile users. The name of the trace file generated should be kept as
mobility.txt and it should be in the NS2 trace file format. The user can also generate the trace
file by using any Traffic Generator like VanetMobSim, SUMO (Simulation of Urban
MObility) etc.

The format of the Trace file is as follows

Step 1: Create a text file inside <NetSim Installation Directory>\bin and rename it as
mobility.txt
Step 2: Open the text file and write the code in format shown below

# To write comments, use # tag

# User needs to specify the total number of Nodes and Environment size as shown below
#nodes: <No. of Nodes> max x = <X_Environment_Size>, max y: <Y_Environment_Size>

#First specify the location of all the devices as per their X, Y and Z Axis
$node_(<Node _ID - 1>) set X_ <Initial X_Coordinate>
$node_(<Node _ ID - 1>) set Y_ <Initial Y_ Coordinate >
$node_(<Node _ ID - 1>) set Z_ <Initial Z_ Coordinate >

#Specify the new location of the specific device at the specific time
$time <Time_in_Secs> "$node_(<Node_ ID - 1>) <X_Coordinate> <Y_ Coordinate > <Z_
Coordinate >"

191
 Step 3: In NetSim, go to MANET and create a Network scenario. Set Mobility Model
as File Based Mobility and simulate.

A sample file based mobility experiment is present at <NetSim Installed Directory> \Docs\
Sample_Configuration\ MANET.

A sample mobility.txt file for a MANET network containing 2 nodes is shown below
#
#nodes: 2 max x = 500.0, max y: 500.0
#
$node_(0) set X_ 70.0
$node_(0) set Y_ 70.0
$node_(0) set Z_ 0.0
$node_(1) set X_ 150.0
$node_(1) set Y_ 150.0
$node_(1) set Z_ 0.0
$time 0.0 "$node_(0) 70.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 0.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 150.0 0.0"
$time 5.0 "$node_(0) 100.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 5.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 160.0 0.0"
$time 10.0 "$node_(0) 130.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 10.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 170.0 0.0"
$time 15.0 "$node_(0) 160.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 15.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 180.0 0.0"
$time 20.0 "$node_(0) 190.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 20.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 190.0 0.0"
$time 25.0 "$node_(0) 220.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 25.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 200.0 0.0"
$time 30.0 "$node_(0) 250.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 30.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 210.0 0.0"
$time 35.0 "$node_(0) 280.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 35.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 220.0 0.0"
$time 40.0 "$node_(0) 310.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 40.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 230.0 0.0"
$time 45.0 "$node_(0) 340.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 45.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 240.0 0.0"
$time 50.0 "$node_(0) 370.00 70.00 0.00"
$time 50.0 "$node_(1) 150.0 250.0 0.0"

192
8.4 Interfacing MATLAB with NetSim
8.4.1 Implement Nakagami Distribution of MATLAB in NetSim without
using .m file

In this example we will replace the default Rayleigh Fading (part of the path loss calculation)
used in NetSim, with a Fading Power calculated using the Nakagami Distribution from
MATLAB

Procedure:

1) Create a MATLAB_Interface.c file inside the WLAN folder which can be found in
the path <NetSim_Install_Direcotry>/src/Simulation/. Write the following code inside the file

MATLAB_Interface.c file

/*
*
* This is a simple program that illustrates how to call the MATLAB
* Engine functions from NetSim C Code.
*
*/
#include <windows.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "engine.h"
#include "mat.h"
#include "mex.h"

char buf[100];
Engine *ep;
int status;
mxArray *h=NULL, *i=NULL, *j=NULL,*k=NULL;
mxArray *out;
double *result;

double fn_matlab_init()
{
/*
* Start the MATLAB engine
*/
if (!(ep = engOpen(NULL))) {
MessageBox ((HWND)NULL, (LPCWSTR)"Can't start MATLAB engine",
(LPCWSTR) "MATLAB_Interface.c", MB_OK);
exit(-1);
}
engEvalString(ep,"desktop");

return 0;
}

double fn_netsim_matlab()
{

193
 //write your own implementation here

int nakagami_shape=5,nakagami_scale=2;

engPutVariable(ep,"h",h);
sprintf(buf,"h=ProbDistUnivParam('nakagami',[%d
%d])",nakagami_shape,nakagami_scale);
status=engEvalString(ep,buf);

engPutVariable(ep,"i",i);
sprintf(buf,"i=random(h,1)");

status=engEvalString(ep,buf);
out=engGetVariable(ep,"i");
result=mxGetPr(out);

return *result;
}

double fn_netsim_matlab_Finish()
{
status=engEvalString(ep,"exit");
return 0;
}

2) Now open WLAN project file, inside the WLAN folder.

3) Right click on WLAN Project present in Solution Explorer window and select
Add Existing Item and select the MATLAB_Interface.c file.

194
4) MATLAB_Interface.c file contains the following functions
a) fn_matlab_init() - Opens the MATLAB Engine
b) fn_netsim_matlab() - Communicates with MATLAB Command Window
c) fn_netsim_matlab_finish() - Closes the MATLAB Engine

5) In the Solution Explorer double click on the WLan.c file.

6) Add a call to fn_matlab_init() inside the fn_NetSim_WLAN_Init() function.

195
7) Similarly add a call to fn_netsim_matlab_Finish() inside the
fn_NetSim_WLAN_Finish() function.

8) In the Solution Explorer double click on the WLAN.h file. Add definitions of the
following functions

double fn_matlab_init();
double fn_netsim_matlab();
double fn_netsim_matlab_Finish();

196
9) In the Solution Explorer double click on the 802_11_PHY.c file.

10) Inside fnCalculateFadingLoss() function comment the lines,

*dFadingPower = log(*dFadingPower);
*dFadingPower= 10*log10(-*dFadingPower);

11) Make a call to the fn_netsim_matlab() function by adding the following line,
*dFadingPower = fn_netsim_matlab();

12) To compile a MATLAB engine application in the Microsoft Visual Studio 10.0
(2010) environment, Right click on the WLAN project and select PROPERTIES in the
solution explorer. Once this window has opened, make the following changes:

197
a) Under C/C++ General, add the following directory to the field ADDITIONAL
INCLUDE DIRECTORIES:
<Path where MATLAB is installed>\extern\include

NOTE: To determine path where MATLAB is installed, entering the following command in the
MATLAB command prompt:
matlabroot

b) Under C/C++ Precompiled Headers, set PRECOMPILED HEADERS as "Not

Using Precompiled Headers".

198
c) Under Linker General, add the directory to the field ADDITIONAL LIBRARY
DIRECTORIES:
<Path where MATLAB is installed>\extern\lib\win32\microsoft

d) Under Configuration Properties Debugging, Add the following Target path in the
ENVIRONMENT:
<Path where MATLAB is installed>\bin\win32

199
13) Under Linker Input, add the following names to the field marked ADDITIONAL
DEPENDENCIES:
libeng.lib, libmx.lib, libmat.lib

14) Make sure that the following directory is in the environment variable PATH:
<Path where MATLAB is installed>\bin\win32

NOTE: To do step 14, check the Windows system path by clicking on Start Right click on
Computer Properties Advanced System Settings Environment variables System
Variables Open "Path" for editing.

Note: If the machine has more than one MATLAB installed, the directory for the target platform
must be ahead of any other MATLAB directory (for instance, when compiling a 32-bit
application, the directory in the MATLAB 32-bit installation must be the first one on the
PATH).

15) Now Right Click on WLAN project and select Rebuild.

200
16) Now replace the newly built libWLAN.dll from the DLL folder, into the NetSim bin
folder. Please ensure you rename the original libWLAN.dll file to retain a copy of the
original file.

[For more information, follow steps provided in Writing your own code: Linking Dlls
under Custom Code in NetSim chapter]

17) Create a Network scenario involving WLAN say MANET, and set the Fading Figure
value in the Multipoint to Multipoint Link properties to 1, to ensure that Rayleigh fading is
set.

18) Perform Simulation. You will find that once the Simulation starts, MATLAB
command window starts and gets closed once the simulation is over.

Note: On Windows systems, engOpen opens a COM channel to MATLAB. The

MATLAB software you registered during installation starts. If you did not register
during installation, enter the following command at the MATLAB prompt:

!matlab -regserver

201
8.4.2 Debug and understand communication between NetSim and
MATLAB

1. In the Solution Explorer of Visual Studio double click on WLAN.c and Add a getch()
inside the fn_NetSim_WLAN_Init() function.

2. In the Solution Explorer double click on MATLAB_Interface.c file and place a

breakpoint inside the fn_netsim_matlab() function before the return statement.

202
3. Now run the NetSim Scenario. The simulation window stops for user interrupt.
4. In Visual studio, go to Debug Attach to Process.
5. From the list of Processes select NetSimCore.exe and click on Attach.

6. Now go to the Simulation window and press Enter.

7. MATLAB Command Window and MATLAB Desktop Window will start and
breakpoint in Visual Studio gets triggered.

203
8. Now when debugging (say, by pressing F5 each time) you will find the computation
taking place in the MATLAB Workspace.

9. This value of i obtained from MATLAB is used to calculate fading power instead of
the Rayleigh Fading Model.

10. Add a watch to the *dFadingPower variable in the 802_11_PHY.c file. For this, right
click on the variable *dFadingPower and select Add Watch option. You will find a watch
window containing the variable name and its value in the bottom left corner.

204
11. Now place another breakpoint after the line *dFadingPower = fn_netsim_matlab()

12. Now when debugging (say by pressing F5 each time) you will find that the watch
window displays the value of *dFadingPower whenever the control reaches the recently set
breakpoint. You will also find that the value of *dFadingPower in the Visual Studio Watch
window and the value of i in the MATLAB workspace window are similar.

205
8.4.3 Implement Nakagami Distribution of MATLAB in NetSim using
.m file:

Procedure:

1. From the NetSim_MATLAB_Interface.zip, Copy and paste

NetSim_MATLAB_Interface /Example1a /nakagami.m file inside <Path where MATLAB is
installed>. The nakagami.m file contains the following code:

function WLAN=nakagami(scale,shape)
h=ProbDistUnivParam('nakagami',[scale,shape]);
i=random(h,1);
WLAN=i;

NOTE: To determine path where MATLAB is installed, entering the following command in the
MATLAB command prompt:
matlabroot

2. From the NetSim_MATLAB_Interface.zip, Copy and Paste

NetSim_MATLAB_Interface /Example1a/ MATLAB_Interface.c file inside the WLAN
folder.
Replace the MATLAB_Interface.c file used for Implement Nakagami Distribution of
MATLAB in NetSim without using .m file (incase if you have performed that section
before).

3. Follow steps 2 to 14 as given in Implement Nakagami Distribution of MATLAB in

NetSim without using .m file.

206
4. Now double click on MATLAB_Interface.c file in the Solution Explorer if a link
exists, else right click on WLAN project and select add existing item to add the file to the
project.

5. Go to the fn_netsim_matlab() function

double fn_netsim_matlab()
{
//write your own implementation here
int nakagami_shape=5,nakagami_scale=2;

sprintf(buf,"k=nakagami(%d,%d)",nakagami_shape,nakagami_scale);
status=engEvalString(ep,buf);
out=engGetVariable(ep,"k");
result=mxGetPr(out);
return *result;
}

6. A call to the nakagami() function inside the nakagami.m file is made, and
nakagami_shape and nakagami_scale parameters are passed from NetSim.

7. Right Click on WLAN project and select Rebuild.

8. Replace the newly build libWLAN.dll from the DLL folder in the NetSim bin folder
after renaming the original libWLAN.dll file.

9. Create a Network scenario involving WLAN say MANET, and set the Fading Figure
value in the Multipoint to Multipoint Link properties to 1 to ensure that Rayleigh fading is
set.

10. You will find that once the Simulation is run MATLAB Command Window starts and
gets closed once the Simulation is over.

You can also debug the code to understand the communication between NetSim and
MATLAB as explained in the DEBUGGING section above.

207
8.4.4 Plot a histogram in MATLAB using the values generated by
Nakagami distribution for NetSim (using .m file).
Procedure:

1. From the NetSim_MATLAB_Interface.zip, Copy and paste

NetSim_MATLAB_Interface/Example1b/NetSim_MATLAB.m file inside
$MATLABROOT.
The NETSIM_MATLAB.m file contains the following code:

function WLAN=NETSIM_MATLAB(choice,varargin)

switch(choice)

case 'nakagami'

h=ProbDistUnivParam('nakagami',[varargin{1},varargin{2}]);
i=random(h,1);
fid = fopen('plotvalues.txt','a+');
fprintf(fid,'%f',i);
fprintf(fid,'\r\n');
fclose('all');
WLAN=i;

case 'plothistogram'

fid=fopen('plotvalues.txt');
mx=fscanf(fid,'%f');
hist(mx);
fclose('all');

end

2. From the NetSim_MATLAB_Interface.zip, Copy and Paste

NetSim_MATLAB_Interface/Example1b/ MATLAB_Interface.c file inside the WLAN
folder. Replace the MATLAB_Interface.c file if it already exists.

3. Follow steps 2 to 14 as given in Example 1

208
4. Now double click on MATLAB_Interface.c file in the Solution Explorer if a link
exists, else right click on WLAN project and select add existing item to add the file to the
project.

5. Go to the fn_netsim_matlab() function

double fn_netsim_matlab(char *arr)

{
//write your own implementation here

int nakagami_shape=5,nakagami_scale=2;

if(strcmp(arr,"nakagami")==0)
{
engPutVariable(ep,"h",h);
sprintf(buf,"h=NETSIM_MATLAB('nakagami',%d,%d)",nakagami_shape,nakagami_scale);
status=engEvalString(ep,buf);
out=engGetVariable(ep,"h");
result=mxGetPr(out);
return *result;
}
else if(strcmp(arr,"plothistogram")==0)
{
status=engEvalString(ep,"NETSIM_MATLAB('plothistogram')");
return 0;
}
else
return 0;
}

6. A call to the NetSim_MATLAB() function inside the NetSim_MATLAB.m file is

made, for fading power calculation with parameters distribution(nakagami),
nakagami_shape and nakagami_scale parameters are passed from NetSim.

7. A call to the NetSim_MATLAB() function inside the NetSim_MATLAB.m file is

made, for plotting histogram for the values generated by MATLAB..

8. Also add the following call to fn_netsim_matlab() function along with a getch() to
plot the histogram before closing the MATLAB Engine.

209
9. Similarly in the call made to fn_netsim_matlab() function in 802_11_PHY.c file add
the parameter nakagami as shown below

10. Also modify the function definition of fn_netsim_matlab() function in WLAN.h file
as shown below

210
11. Right Click on WLAN project and select Rebuild.

12. Now Replace the newly build libWLAN.dll from the DLL folder in the NetSim bin
folder after renaming the original libWLAN.dll file.

13. Create a Network scenario involving WLAN say MANET, and set the Fading Figure
value in the Multipoint to Multipoint Link properties to 1 to ensure that Rayleigh fading is
set.

14. You will find that once the Simulation is run MATLAB Command Window starts and
once the Simulation is over a histogram is displayed in MATLAB for the values that were
generated using nakagami distribution.

15. The graph and the MATLAB windows gets closed once you press any key.

You can also debug the code to understand the communication between NetSim and
MATLAB as explained in the DEBUGGING section above.

211
8.5 Adding Custom Performance Metrics
In Performance Metrics, users have the latitude of adding their own customized metric
variables by editing the source code of the protocol of that specific networking technology.
The following example provides a better understanding of how to implement it.

For illustration, an example regarding Wireless Sensor Network is provided. In this example,
users will print Sensor Node Name, Residual Energy, State(On/Off) and turnoff time in the
performance metrics

STEP 1: Copy the provided code at the top in 802_15_4.h file

#include "string.h"

double NetSim_Residual_Energy[100];
string NetSim_Node_name[100];
double NetSim_Off_Time[100];
string NetSim_Node_state[100];

STEP 2:

Copy the below code (in red colour) in 802_15_4.c file (inside fn_NetSim_Zigbee_Metrics()
function)

_declspec(dllexport) int fn_NetSim_Zigbee_Metrics(char* szMetrics)

{
FILE* fp;
int i;
NETSIM_ID nDeviceCount = NETWORK->nDeviceCount;
fp=fopen(szMetrics,"a+");
fprintf (fp,"#Custom WSN Metrics\n");
fprintf (fp,"Node Name\tStatus\tTime\tResidual_Energy\n");
for (i = 1; i <= nDeviceCount; i++)
{
NetSim_Residual_Energy[i-1]=pstruDevicePower[i-1]->dRemainingPower;
fprintf(fp,"%s\t%s\t%lf\t%lf\n",NetSim_Node_name[i-1],
NetSim_Node_state[i-1], NetSim_Off_Time[i-1], NetSim_Residual_Energy[i-1]);
}
fclose(fp);
return fn_NetSim_Zigbee_Metrics_F(szMetrics);
}

212
STEP 3:

Copy the below code (in red colour) at the end of ChangeRadioState.c file (inside IF(nStatus)
loop)

if(nStatus)
{
WSN_PHY(nDeviceId)->nOldState = nOldState;
WSN_PHY(nDeviceId)->nRadioState = nNewState;
NetSim_Node_state[nDeviceId-1]= "ON";
NetSim_Node_name[nDeviceId-1]= NETWORK->ppstruDeviceList[nDeviceId-1]-
>szDeviceName;
return nStatus;
}
else
{
WSN_PHY(nDeviceId)->nRadioState = RX_OFF;
WSN_MAC(nDeviceId)->nNodeStatus = OFF;
NetSim_Off_Time[nDeviceId-1] = ldEventTime;
NetSim_Node_state[nDeviceId-1]= "OFF";
NetSim_Node_name[nDeviceId-1]= NETWORK->ppstruDeviceList[nDeviceId-1]-
>szDeviceName;
return nStatus;

STEP 4:

Build DLL with the modified code and run a Wireless Sensor Network scenario.

After Simulation, user will notice a new Performance metrics named Custom WSN
Metrics is added

213
9 Programming Exercises
This menu contains network programming exercises and is not available in Pro version.
Run down the menu and select the desired programming exercise. The programs available are
as follows,
Assignments of Sites to Concentrator
Address Resolution Protocol
Cryptography
o Substitution
o Transposition
o XOR
o Advanced
Data Encryption Standard
RSA
Wired Equivalent Privacy
Distance Vector Routing
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Error Correcting Code
o Hamming Code
Error Detecting Codes
o Cyclic Redundancy Check
o Longitudinal Redundancy Check
Framing Sequence
o Bit Stuffing
o Character Stuffing
Generic Cell Rate Algorithm
o Virtual Scheduling Algorithm
IPV4 Addressing
o Address Mask
o Binary Conversion
o Classless InterDomain Routing
o Network Address
o Special Addresses

214
 o Subnetting
IPV6 Addressing
o EUI - 64 Interface Identifier
o Host Addresses
o Subnetting
Leaky Bucket Algorithm
Multi Level Multi Access
Multiple Access Technology
o CDMA
o TDMA
o OFDMA
PC to PC Communication
o Socket Programming
o Chat Application
Scheduling
Shortest Path
Sliding Window Protocol
Sorting Techniques
Spanning Tree
Transmission Flow Control
NetSims Programming Lab has been designed to provide hands - on network programming
skills to students. The labs come with a GUI where students can first run the experiment in
Sample mode and subsequently link their own code and visualize its working. Programs
can be written in C and the executable can be linked to NetSim.

215
9.1 Architecture
The following Architecture is applicable for all the exercises under the Programming
menu. Each exercise has two modules

Using the Input - Output module inputs are given and output is viewed. The working of the
concept/algorithm is done in the process module. The link between the Input - Output
module and process module is as follows
Input - Output Process

Input Text file

Input Read Input
(Input.txt)
Process

Output Output Text file

(Output.txt) Write Output

Process is the module for which the user has to write and link the written code when using the
user mode.
The code can be written either by C or C++, the executable file created should be linked to
the software.
The input and output file format should be as required, as they form the link between the
software and the user executable file.

216
9.2 Creating .exe file for Programming Exercise

9.2.1 Using Visual Studio

1. Select FileNewProject

2. Select Win32Console Application. Name the project and select location to save the
project and then click OK button.

217
3. Click Next Check Whether Console application is selected or not. If selected, then
select Empty Project, otherwise select Console application and Empty Project and
finally click Finish button.

4. Add source codes to the project. Right click on the Source FilesAddNew Item

218
5. Select C++ File (.cpp) and name the file with extension of .c

6. Now Source file is created

219
7. Copy and paste the source code.

8. Select the mode for creating the exe i.e., debug or release mode by choosing the
required option as shown in the figure. The preferred setting is debug mode.

220
9. To build the Solution,Select Build Menu Build Solution

10. Now, Exe is created in the Project Folder as shown below.

221
9.2.2 Using GCC
By using Command Prompt:
C / C++ files can be created using any editor. Ex: Notepad
Once C / C++ file is ready go to command prompt using Start Run.

There are three cases for creating Exe (.exe) file using GCC.
Case 1: C programs
1. Set the path as C program path

2. Create Output file (.o file) using the command

gcc - C Filename.c

3. Create exe file (.exe file) using the command

gcc -o filename filename.o

4. Once exe file is created link that exe file with NetSim Programming User mode

222
Case 2: C++ programs
1. Set the path as C++ program path.

2. Create output file (.o file) using the command.

g++ -C Filename.c

3. Create exe file (.exe file) using the command

g++ -o filename filename.o

4. Once exe file is created link that exe file with NetSim Programming User mode
Case 3: Socket programs
1. Set the path to Socket program location.

2. Create output file (.o file) using below command.

gcc -C Filename.c

223
 3. Create exe file (.exe file) using below command
gcc -o send send.o -lws2_32

4. Once exe file is created link that exe file with NetSim Programming User mode

9.2.3 Using Dev C++

1. Open the C source code file in Dev C++. Then go to Execute Compile.

Dev C++ will create the exe file in the same location where the C source code file is
located

2. Once exe file is created , link that exe file with NetSim Programming User mode

Note: For Windows 8 and above, use Dev C++ v 5.11

224
Note: For Windows Vista, set up Dev C++ as shown below

In Dev C++ 4.9.9.2.exe, go to Tools Compiler Options Directories tab Binaries tab

Add the following path as per your installation directory in the text box provided and click on
add button.

C:\Dev-Cpp\libexec\gcc\mingw32\3.4.2

In the C Includes tab add the follwing path in the text box provided and click on add button.

C:\Dev-Cpp\lib\gcc\mingw32\3.4.2\include

225
In the programs tab edit the following paths as shown in screenshot.

226
9.3 Steps to perform Programming Exercise in NetSim
In NetSim, select Programming < The exercise you want > .

Step 1:
In the left panel, select the Mode as Sample. Provide the required inputs in the panel and
click on Run.

So presently NetSim will run that algorithm code already present in the software and will
display the result graphically.

Step 2:
For user to write their own C Code in NetSim and check the result, click on Concept
Algorithm Pseudo Code and Flowchart (present in Help in the left pane) and understand the
working of the algorithm.

Step 3:
Then click on Interface Source Code (present in Help in the left pane).
Open Dev C++ or any GNU C compiler based IDK and copy the code from the Interface
Source Code.

The user needs to edit the Interface Source Code at the following location. For Example,

int fnCrc12(char* pszString)

{
// Write your own code here
}

So the user needs to write the code, create exe and attach it with NetSim to run.

Step 4:
Create .exe file. In the left panel, select the Mode as User. Select the .exe file created above.
Set the input and click Run. So presently NetSim will run code which is written by the user
and will display the result graphically.
In case of any error, ERROR IN USER CODE message will be displayed.

227
9.4 How to De-bug your code linked to NetSims
Programming Exercise
In NetSim, programming exercise menu, users can write and link their code as executables
(*.exe). If the users *.exe file does not provide the correct output, NetSim UI will display the
message Error in User Code. To de-bug your code on getting this message, follow the steps
given below:
1. Run the scenario again in sample mode. On completion, minimize NetSim and keep it
running without closing the programming exercise.
2. Open your code in Visual studio 2010.The procedure is explained above in Creating.exe
file for Programming Exercises.

3. Right click on your project in the Solution Explorer pane and select properties as shown
below

228
4. Inside the properties window select Debugging and edit the Command Arguments as
shown

5. Inside command argument add the following two paths

a. Path to where NetSim is installed within double quotes . This is usually
C:\Program Files\NetSim Standard. This can be got by right clicking on the NetSim
icon and selecting Find target or open file location.
b. The windows temporary path which has the NetSim folder for temporary data. This
can be got by Start Run and typing %temp%/NetSim

c. On clicking this, you will get a path similar to C:\Users\George\Local Settings

\Temp\NetSim. As mentioned above, this should also be in double quotes , and
there should be a single space between the first path and the second path.For example:
"C:\Program Files (x86)\NetSim Standard\bin\NetSim.exe" "C:\Users\George
\AppData \Local \Temp\NetSim

229
6. Now add a breakpoint to your code in your function or in the main ( ), and proceed with
de-bugging
7. At the end check if the output.txt present in the %temp%\NetSim path and the temp.txt
present in the %temp%\NetSim path are exactly similar. Exact similarity would indicate
that your code will work fine when you run it in use mode the next time.

230
9.5 Programming Exercises
9.5.1 Address Resolution Protocol
Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Address Resolution Protocol to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

The first line of the Input.txt contains the The output file should contain two lines,
number of nodes in the network, following The first line has the details of the Source
which the IP Addresses are assigned to each (i.e.) in which class it is present. The second
node (ascending order). The last two lines are line has the result of the ARP i.e., whether
the Source node IP Address and the destination is present in the class.
Destination node IP Address respectively.

An example format of input.txtis given below, The second line has the flag value
(important) that is used for the animation.
Number_of_Nodes=3
The result for the above is:
Node1_IP_Address=192.168.1.1
Node2_IP_Address=192.168.1.2 Source is Class C.Destination is present in
Node3_IP_Address=192.168.1.3 that class 2
Source_Node_IP_ Address=192.168.1.3
Destination_Node_IP_Address=192.168.1.1

231
Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given and using this the user can write only the Address
Resolution Protocol inside the function fnARP () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to NetSim Installation path / src / Programming /
ARP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenario:

Objective - To find the Medium Access Control (MAC) Address of the Destination Node
using Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim by using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu select Address Resolution Protocol(ARP).

Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,

Sample Mode should be selected.

Click on the drop down button and select 6 Nodes.
List of NodesNumbers along with their IPAddresses that would be availed are,
Node Numbers IP Address

1 192.168.1.1
2 192.168.1.2
3 192.168.1.3
4 192.168.1.4
5 192.168.1.5
6 192.168.1.6
ARP Request System and ARP Reply System needs to be selected. That is,
1. ARP Request System 192.168.1. 1 (Any one Node Number to be
selected)
2. ARP Reply System 192.168.1. 6 (Any one Node Number to be selected)
Then Run button need to be clicked.

232
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,

The Source Node (i.e. Node Number 1 in the above example) sends the ARP
Request to the Connecting Device.
The Connecting Device then broadcasts the ARP Request to all the Nodes
available in the network.
The Destination Node (i.e. Node Number 6 in the above example) sends an
acknowledgement in the form of ARP Reply (i.e. The Destination MAC -
MAC Address of the Destination Node) to the Connecting Device.
The Device then transmits the ARP Reply (i.e. The Destination MAC - MAC
Address of the Destination Node) only to the Source Node.
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create new samples.

233
9.5.2 Assignment of Sites to Concentrator

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Assignment of Sites to Concentrator
to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input file format Output file format

Input.txt contains the number of sites, In the output file (i.e. Output.txt) each line
number of concentrators, and number of should indicate one complete traverse. For
sites that can be assigned to a concentrator, example, for the above input, the output file
the order in which sites are to be assigned should be:
and the distance matrix given by the user. 2>1>
The format of input.txtis:
1>2>
Number_of_Sites=2
In each line, the first character indicates the
Number_of_Concentrators=2 site and the rest indicates the concentrators.
Sites_per_Concentrator=1 The second character (excluding the >
symbol) is the first concentrator found with
Selected_Priority=1>0>
minimum distance/cost. The third character
Distance is a concentrator, which has the minimum
1>2> distance/cost compared to the previous one
and so on.
3>4>
Note:> is the delimiter symbol, which is
Note: > is the delimiter symbol, which is used to separate each input.
used to separate each input.

234
Interface Source Code

Interface Source code code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
Assignments of Sites to Concentrators inside the function fnAssignmentsofSites() using the
variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ AssignSites.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To allocate the resource which is concentrator to the require system which is
sites based on the distance for each sites to concentrator.

How to proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise
available, under programming user has to select Assignment of Sites to Concentrator.

Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
Sample Mode should be selected.
Number of Sites need to be selected. The value that has selected ranges from 1 to
7.
Number of Concentrators need to be selected. The values available for selection
are 2, 3 and 4.
Number of Sites / Concentrators need to be selected. The value that has selected
ranges from 1 to 7.
Click on the image to select Priority. Click on Change Priority to reset the
Priority of the Sites.
Enter the Distance in the given table. Distance should be in the range, 1 to 99 km.
Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs
have to be given.
Click on Concept, Algorithm, Pseudo Code & Flow Chart to get help on it.

235
Output - The following steps are under gone internally,
The site which has the highest priority searches for a concentrator which is the
nearest.
A red line appears between the site and a concentrator. This indicates the only
shortest path available between the site and the concentrators. Hence, it
indicates the site has been allocated to that concentrator.
A site can have only one concentrator, whereas a concentrator can have many
sites linked to it.
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

236
9.5.3 Cryptography - Substitution - Encryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Substitution to NetSim.

Pre-conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

There are six lines in Input.txt file. Plain letter>encrypted letter for the
corresponding plain letter>
Cryptographic_Technique=Substitution
Cryptographic_Method=Encryption t>u>v>
e>f>g>
Plain_Text:
t>u>v>
tetcos
c>d>e>
Key_Text:
o>p>q>
2
s>t>u>

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Substitution-
Encryption inside the function fnSubstutionEncryption () using the variables already
declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

237
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SubstEncrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

238
9.5.4 Cryptography - Substitution - Decryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Substitution to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

There are six lines in Input.txt file. Cipher letter>decrypted letter for the
corresponding cipher letter>
Cryptographic_Technique=Substitution
v>u>t>
Cryptographic_Method=Decryption
g>f>e>
Cipher_Text:
v>u>t>
vgvequ
e>d>c>
Key_Text:
q>p>o>
2
u>t>s>

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Substitution-
Decryption inside the function SubstutionDecryption () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

239
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SubstDecrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Encrypt and decrypt the message with the same key value using Substitution.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming user has to select Cryptography Substitution.

Encryption:

Sample Input: In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Encryption need to be selected.

Enter the Plain Text that needs to be encrypted. Maximum of 8 alphabets need
to be entered.

Enter the Key Value. This is an Integer which is within the range 0 to 26.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

The Plain Text and Key Value entered would be displayed in red color.

The corresponding Cipher Text would be obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

Decryption:

Sample Input: In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

240
 Decryption need to be selected.

Cipher Text obtained while encryption is filled in the Plain Text and also the
Key Text is same as that entered while encrypting.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

The Cipher Text and Key Value entered would be displayed in red color.

The corresponding Plain Text that had been entered at the time of encrypting is
obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

241
9.5.5 Cryptography - Transposition - Encryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Transposition Encryption to NetSim.

Pre-conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt. The user program after executing the concept should write the required output
to a file named Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Technique=Transposition 1>3>4>5>2>
Cryptographic_Method=Encryption T>E>T>C>O>S>T>E>T>C>
Plain_Text: T>S>O>C>E>T>T>E>C>T>
TETCOS
Key_Text:
BLORE
Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
Transposition-Encryption inside the function fnTranspositionEncryption() using the variables
already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ TranspEncrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

242
9.5.6 Cryptography - Transposition Decryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Transposition Decryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Technique=Transposition BELOR>
Cryptographic_Method=Decryption 1>5>2>3>4>
Cipher_Text: T>O>E>T>C>S>C>T>E>T>
TSOCETTECT
Key_Text:
BLORE

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
Transposition-Decryption inside the function fnTranspositionDecryption() using the variables
already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ TranspDecrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

243
 Open file location in Windows 7
Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Encrypt and decrypt the message with the same key text using Transposition.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming user has to select Cryptography Transposition.

Encryption:

Sample Input: In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Encryption need to be selected.

Enter the Cipher Text. Maximum of 14 Characters can be entered.

Enter the Key Value. Maximum of 8 alphabets can be entered.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

The entered Key Value would be displayed first.

The order of the Key Value is internally sensed.

The corresponding Cipher Text is obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked
to create New Samples.

Decryption:

Sample Input: In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

Once Encryption is done Decryption has to be selected.

The Cipher Text obtained for Encryption is the Cipher Text for
Decryption. This would be automatically taken. Maximum of 14
Characters can be entered.

244
 Enter the Key Value will also be taken internally. Maximum of 8 alphabets
can be entered.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

The entered Key Value would be displayed first. This is arranged in such a
way that the order is changed when compared to Encryption.

The order of the Key Value is internally sensed.

The corresponding Plain Text is obtained. This Plain Text would be

similar to the Plain Text entered at the time of Encryption.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked
to create New Samples.

245
9.5.7 Cryptography - XOR - Encryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for XOR Encryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Technique=XOR 01010100>01000010>00010110>
Cryptographic_Method=Encryption 01000101>01001110>00001011>
Plain_Text: 01010100>01001100>00011000>
TETCOS 01000011>01001111>00001100>
Key_Text: 01001111>01010010>00011101>
BNLORE 01010011>01000101>00010110>
Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the XOR-
Encryption inside the function fnXOREncryption () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ XorEncrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

246
9.5.8 Cryptography - XOR - Decryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for XOR Decryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type"%temp%"NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Technique=XOR 00010110>01000010>01010100>
Cryptographic_Method=Decryption 00001011>01001110>01000101>
Cipher_Text: 00011000>01001100>01010100>
00010110000010110001100000001100000 00001100>01001111>01000011>
1110100010110 00011101>01010010>01001111>
Key_Text:
00010110>01000101>01010011>
BNLORE

Interface Source Code

Here a skeleton code written in C is given using this the user can write only the XOR-
Decryption inside the function fnXORDecryption () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ XorDecrypt.c

247
To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Encrypt and Decrypt the message by using the same KeyText in XOR.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu select Cryptography XOR.
Note:Encryption should be done first and then Decryption should be done.
Encryption:

Sample Inputs - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
o SampleMode should be selected.
o EncryptionMode needs to be selected.
o PlainText and KeyValue need to be entered in the fields available. That
is,
Plain Text tetcos (Maximum of 8 Characters)
Key Text 123456 (Maximum of 8 Characters)
Note: If the length of the PlainText and Key Value differs then an error
would pop out.
o Then Run button need to be clicked.
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,
o Plain Text t e t c o s
o Key Text 1 2 3 4 5 6
o Binary of plain text 01110011
o Binary of key text 00110110
o XOR Value 01000101
o ASCII Equivalent 69 87 71 87 90 69
o Cipher Text E W G W Z E

248
 Decryption:

Sample Inputs - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
o SampleMode should be selected.
o After completing the Encryption part, DecryptionMode needs to be
selected.
o CipherText (this field is automatically filled) and KeyValue (this should
be same as the one that is entered in Encryption) need to be entered in the
fields available. That is,
CipherText
010001010101011101000111010101110101101001000101 (Cipher
Text in Binary Format Maximum 64 bits)
KeyText 123456 (Maximum of 8 Characters)
Note - Both Cipher Text and Key Text is automatically taken when
Decryption button is selected (i.e. after undergoing Encryption).
o Then Run button need to be clicked.
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,
o Cipher Text E W G W Z E
o Key Text 1 2 3 4 5 6
o Binary of cipher text 01000101
o Binary of key text 00110110
o XOR Value 01110011
o ASCII Equivalent 116 101 116 99 111 115
o Plain Text t e t c o s
Note -
o Text in the Input of the Encryption and Output of the Decryption
should be the same if the Key Value is same.
o The Cipher Text in case of Encryption is Alpha Numeric (i.e. for the
user to understand in a better manner)and in case of Decryption the tool
converts it to Binary form (i.e. since, the tool doesnt recognize Alpha
Numeric).

249
9.5.9 Cryptography - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Encryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for DES Encryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,The results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

250
6bit - 4 Bit conversion logic (in each S-Box):

Of the 6 input bits, 4 bits (1, 2, 3, and 4) are used for identifying the S-Box column (4 bits
representing 16 columns) and the remaining 2 bits (0, 5) are used for identifying the S-Box
row (2 bits representing 4 rows). The corresponding hexadecimal number is chosen from the
S-box. Since each Hexadecimal number represents 4 bits in binary form, the total output is of
32 bits.

251
 Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Method=Encryption The number of lines present depends on the number of

iterations chosen. The number of lines equals the number
Key_Text=abcdef1234567890
of iterations, plus one. The last line of inputs gives the
No_of_Iterations=1 data (encrypted data if encryption has been chosen, else
Data=tetcos the decrypted data
if decryption has been chosen). The previous lines give
the DES Key generated for encryption or decryption.
1101010101111100100110101100001011100110000110
01616075733F724B40

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the DES-
Encryption inside the function fnDESEncryption() using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ DesEncrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

252
9.5.10 Cryptography - Data Encryption Standard (DES) - Decryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for DES Decryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

253
254
6bit - 4 Bit conversion logic (in each S-Box):

Of the 6 input bits, 4 bits (1, 2, 3, 4) are used for identifying the S-Box column (4 bits
representing 16 columns) and the remaining 2 bits (0, 5) are used for identifying the S-

Box row (2 bits representing 4 rows). The corresponding hexadecimal number is chosen from
the S-box. Since each Hexadecimal number represents 4 bits in binary form, the total output
is of 32 bits.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Method=Decryption The number of lines present depends on the number of

iterations chosen. The number of lines equals the number of
Key_Text=abcdef1234567890
iterations, plus one. The last line of inputs gives the data
No_of_Iterations=1 (encrypted data if encryption has been chosen, else the
Data=616075733F724B40 decrypted data if decryption has been chosen). The previous
lines give the DES Key generated for encryption or
decryption.
110101010111110010011010110000101110011000011001
tetcos

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the DES-
Decryption inside the function fnDESDecryption () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ DesDecrypt.c

255
To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Encrypt and decrypt the message with the using DES.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming user has to select
CryptographyAdvancedDataEncryptionStandard.

Encryption:

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Encryption need to be selected.

Enter the Key Text in the provided field. Only hexadecimal characters
have to be entered. Maximum of 16 characters can be entered in this field.
Characters more than 16 will be filled in the Data field.

Number of Iterations need to be selected. The value ranges from 1 to 16.

Data needs to be entered in this field that has to be encrypted. Data can be
entered only when the Enter Key Text field is filed with 16 hexadecimal
characters. Maximum of 1500 characters can be stuffed into this field.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output -

Key1 (i.e. if Iteration is 1) in binary format is obtained.

The corresponding Cipher text is obtained.

Click on Copy button and then on the Paste button to make use of the
Cipher text for Decryption.

256
 Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked
to create New Samples.

Decryption:

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Once the Encryption is done, click on Copy and Paste buttons. The
encrypted data is filled in the data field available in the Decryption view.

Fields such as Enter the Key Text, Number of Iteration and Data is filled
in automatically when Copy and Paste button is clicked.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Key1 (i.e. if Iteration is 1) in binary format is obtained.

The Data that was entered in the Encryption view would be encrypted and
displayed.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

257
9.5.11 Rivest-Shamir - Adleman Algorithm (RSA)

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for RSAAlgorithmto NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input file format Output file format

Input.txt file has the input data. The dt1>dt2>dt3>dt4>dt5>dt6>dt7>dt8>
format is: dt 1: specifies the prime P
Plain_Text=T dt 2: specifies the prime Q
dt 3: specifies the value of N
dt 4: specifies the value of Z
dt 5: specifies the value of Kp
dt 6: specifies the value of Ks
dt 7: specifies the value of the Cipher Text
dt 8: specifies the value of the Plain Text
Example:
For input: T
Output: 11>3>33>20>7>3>14>20>

258
Interface Source Code

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ RSA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenario:

Objective - Encrypt and decrypt the message with the using DES.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming user has to select
CryptographyAdvancedRSA.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Plain Text of only one character has to be entered in the field available.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Value of the prime numbers P and Q are obtained.

Value of N[p*q] is obtained.

Value of Z [(p-1)*(q-1)] is obtained.

Value of Kp and Ks is obtained

Plain Text which is the actual count of the alphabet is obtained.

The corresponding Cipher Text is obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

259
9.5.12 Cryptography - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Encryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for WEP Encryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Cryptographic_Method=Encryption There are 3 lines in output.txt file

Data: Initialization Vector
TETCOS Key Text
Cipher Text
Ex:
8A699C
0123456789
364130B9CA018D5B760383CD85528751

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the WEP-
Encryption inside the function fnWEPEncrypt () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ WEPEncrypt.c

260
To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

261
9.5.13 Cryptography - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) - Decryption

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for WEP Decryption to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:

The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Output File Format

Input File Format

Cryptographic_Method=Decryption Plain text

Initialization_Vector=8A699C Ex:
Key=0123456789 TETCOS
Data: 364130B9CA018D5B760383CD85528751

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the WEP-
Decryption inside the function fnWEPDecrypt () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ WEPDecrypt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

262
 Open file location in Windows 7
Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Encrypt and Decrypt the message by using WEP.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In Programming menu select CryptographyAdvancedWired
Equivalent Privacy.
Note: Encryption should be done first and then Decryption should be done.
Encryption

Sample Inputs - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
o SampleMode should be selected.
o Under CryptographicMethod, Encryption Mode needs to be selected.
o InputData (Maximum of 1500 Characters) - NetSim TetCos
Bangalore
o Then Run button need to be clicked.

Sample Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,

o Initialization Vector : 3E41C6
o Key : ABCDEF0123
o The Encrypted Text obtained -
786441A955C419F9537576954F897BCC5866549653DB5CA73E1B4D
F63CA939AD
o Click on Copy button and then on Paste button. This would Copy the
EncryptedText onto the DecryptionInputDatafield.
Decryption

Sample Inputs - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,

263
 o Sample Mode should be selected. (This is Automatically selected once
the Paste button is clicked at the time of Encrypting the Data).
o Under Cryptographic Method, Encryption Mode needs to be selected.
(This is Automatically selected once the Paste button is clicked at the
time of Encrypting the Data).
o Enter Key Value 3E41C6ABCDEF0123 (16Hexadecimal Characters).
(This field is Automatically filled once the Paste button is clicked at the
time of Encrypting the Data).
o Number of Iterations 1.
o InputData -
786441A955C419F9537576954F897BCC5866549653DB5CA73E1B4D
F63CA939AD (This field is Automatically filled once the Paste button
is clicked at the time of Encrypting the Data).
o Then Run button need to be clicked.

Sample Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,

o Initialization Vector : 3E41C6
o Key : ABCDEF0123
o The EncryptedText obtained - NetSim TetCos Bangalore

264
9.5.14 Distance Vector Routing

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Distance Vector Routing to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Router_ID=1>Router_Name=Router_1>No_Of_Neig Initial Stage>Source Router ID -

hbour=2>Neighbours_ID=2>5 1>Destination
RouterID>CostID>Intermediate
Router_ID=2>Router_Name=Router_2>No_Of_Neig
RouterID
hbour=1>Neighbours_ID=1
Ex:
Router_ID=3>Router_Name=Router_3>No_Of_Neig
hbour=0 0>1>2>1>0
Router_ID=4>Router_Name=Router_4>No_Of_Neig 0>1>5>1>0
hbour=0 0>2>1>1>0
Router_ID=5>Router_Name=Router_5>No_Of_Neig 0>5>1>1>0
hbour=1>Neighbours_ID=1
1>1>2>1>0
Router_ID=6>Router_Name=Router_6>No_Of_Neig
hbour=0 1>1>5>1>0
1>2>1>1>0
1>2>5>2>1
1>5>1>1>0
1>5>2>2>1

265
 2>1>2>1>0
2>1>5>1>0
2>2>1>1>0
2>2>5>2>1
2>5>1>1>0
2>5>2>2>1

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Distance
Vector Routing inside the function fnDistVectAlgorithm() using the variables already
declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ DVR.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Find the Shortest Path using Distance Vector Routing.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim by using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectDistance Vector Routing.
Sample Input -Follow the below given steps,
Click on two Routers to establish a Path (i.e. 1st Click on Router number 1
and 2, then similarly on Router number 2 and 3, 3 and 4, 4 and 5, 5 and 6,
& 6 and 1).
Router 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 are connected.
Click on Initial, Intermediate and Final button to execute.
Output - The Output that is obtained is given below,

266
Initial button can be clicked to view the initial table of the all router.

Intermediate button can be clicked to view the intermediate table of the all router.

Final button can be clicked to view the final table of the all router.

267
9.5.15 Distance Host Configuration Protocol

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Number_of_Clients = 4 DHCP_DISCOVER>
Start_Address = 192.168.0.105 Node1>Node2>
End_Address = 192.168.0.109 Node1>Node3>
Mask = 255.255.255.0 Node1>Node4>
Node1>Server
DHCP_OFFER>
Server>Node1
DHCP_REQUEST>
Node1>Server
DHCP_ACK>
Server>192.168.0.105

DHCP_DISCOVER>
Node2>Node1>
Node2>Node3>
Node2>Node4>
Node2>Server
DHCP_OFFER>
Server>Node2
DHCP_REQUEST>
Node2>Server

268
 DHCP_ACK>
Server>192.168.0.106

DHCP_DISCOVER>
Node3>Node1>
Node3>Node2>
Node3>Node4>
Node3>Server
DHCP_OFFER>
Server>Node3
DHCP_REQUEST>
Node3>Server
DHCP_ACK>
Server>192.168.0.107

DHCP_DISCOVER>
Node4>Node1>
Node4>Node2>
Node4>Node3>
Node4>Server
DHCP_OFFER>
Server>Node4
DHCP_REQUEST>
Node4>Server
DHCP_ACK>
Server>192.168.0.108

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol inside the function fnDHCPServer() and fnDHCPClient() using
the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming / DHCP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Find the Shortest Path using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.

269
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim by using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectDynamic Host Configuration
Protocol.
Sample Input -Follow the below given steps,
Select number of clients.
Set the Start Address and the End Address
Click on Run button to execute.
Output - The Output that is obtained is given below,

270
9.5.16 Error Correcting Code - Hamming Code

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Hamming Code Generator to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input file format Output file format

Parity=Odd Output.txt file, the first line is the count of check bits to be
introduced in the current hamming code application. The next 8
Data=a
lines is the check bit calculation process, the first four lines are
Error_Position=7 for input data and the next four lines are for the error data.
Data_Bits_Original=01100001 1 and 2 are the check bits that vary in the Hamming String. The
Data_Bits_Error=00100001 last value is the actual position in the Hamming Code generated
where the data bits has been changed.
4 - The number of check bits introduced
3>5>7>9>11>13>0>0>- the check bit of position 1 of input
data
3>6>7>10>11>1>1>- the check bit of position 2 of input data
5>6>7>12>13>0>0>- the check bit of position 4 of input data
9>10>11>12>13>0>0>- the check bit of position 8 of input

271
 data
3>5>7>9>11>13>0>0>- the check bit of position 1 of error
data
3>6>7>10>11>1>1>- the check bit of position 2 of error data
5>6>7>12>13>1>1>- the check bit of position 4 of error data
9>10>11>12>13>1>1>- the check bit of position 8 of error
data
4>8>12>- the check bit position whose value has been changed
and the final error position.

Interface Source Code

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ HammingCode.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To detect and correct the single bit error occurs in the transmission of data.

How to proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise
available, under programming user has to select Error Correcting Code Hamming Code

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Parity need to be selected. Either Odd or Even can be selected.

Data need to be entered. Maximum of 8 alphabets can be entered.

Error Position needs to be selected. Based on the input, its values ranges.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Data Bits which if in the binary form is obtained. This Data Bits is obtained for
Original Data entered as well as for the Error selected.

272
 Depending on the Parity selected, tables of Hamming String, Original Data and
Error Data will be obtained.

For the Error Data table to be obtained click on the Next button available in the
output panel. When the Error Data table is obtained Error Position value is
also obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

273
9.5.17 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) - 12

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to Run his/her own code for Cyclic Redundancy Check to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File format

Algorithm=CRC_12 Output contains two values, which is the

written in the separate line.
Condition=No_Error
The First line has the CRC value of the
File_Path=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\Docum
data (Sender side CRC value).
ents\1 Th.txt>
The Second line has the CRC value of the
data (Receiver side CRC value).
Example: 8CB
000

274
Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Cyclic
Redundancy Check inside the function fnCRC () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Crc12.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To detect the error found in the file transferred between a Sender and Receiver
using CRC12.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming Menu selectError Detecting CodesCyclic
Redundancy Check.

Sample Input
For No Error Case -Follow the below given steps,
0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRC12 as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, NoError should be selected.
3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs
have to be given.
For Error Case - Follow the below given steps,
0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRC12 as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, Error should be selected.

275
 3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC.The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs
have to be given.

Sample Output
For No Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Zero when the .txt file is
received by the Node2. The message Data Frame is Flowing from Node1 to
Node2 with No Error.
For Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Non-Zero when the .txt file
is received by the Node2. The message Data Frame is Flowing from Node1 to
Node2 with Error.

276
9.5.18 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 16

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Cyclic Redundancy Check to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File format

Algorithm=CRC_16 Output contains two values, which is the

Condition=No_Error written in the separate line.
The First line has the CRC value of the data
File_Path=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\Doc
(Sender side CRC value).
uments\1 Th.txt>
The Second line has the CRC value of the data
(Receiver side CRC value).
Example:
0FCF
0000

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Cyclic
Redundancy Check inside the function fnCRC () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

277
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Crc16.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To detect the error found in the file transferred between a Sender and Receiver
using CRC16.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectError Detecting CodesCyclic
Redundancy Check.
Sample Input
For No Error Case -Follow the below given steps,
5. SampleMode should be selected.
6. SelectCRC16 as Algorithm from the list available.
7. Under Condition, No Error should be selected.
8. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
9. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.
For Error Case - Follow the below given steps,
10. SampleMode should be selected.
11. SelectCRC16 as Algorithm from the list available.
12. Under Condition, Error should be selected.
13. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
14. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

278
Sample Output
For No Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Zero when the .txtfile
is received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing from Node1
to Node2 with NoError.
For Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Non-Zero when the
.txtfile is received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing
from Node1 to Node2 with Error.

279
9.5.19 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) - 32

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Cyclic Redundancy Check to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File format

Algorithm=CRC_32 Output contains two values, which is the

Condition=No_Error written in the separate line.

File_Path=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\Documents\1 The First line has the CRC value of the

data (Sender side CRC value).
Th.txt>
The Second line has the CRC value of
the data (Receiver side CRC value).
Example:
DD8F598B
00000000

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Cyclic
Redundancy Check inside the function fnCRC () using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Crc32.c

280
To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To detect the error found in the file transferred between a Sender and Receiver
using CRC32.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectError Detecting CodesCyclic
Redundancy Check.
Sample Input
For No Error Case -Follow the below given steps,
0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRC32 as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, NoError should be selected.
3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The
file should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.
For Error Case - Follow the below given steps,
0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRC32 as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, Error should be selected.
3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The
file should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Sample Output
For No Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Zero when the
.txtfile is received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing
from Node1 to Node2 with NoError.

281
 For Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Non-Zero when the
.txtfile is received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing
from Node1 to Node2 with Error.

282
9.5.20 Error Detection Code - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) CCITT

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Cyclic Redundancy Check to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File format

Algorithm=CRC_CCITT Output contains two values, which is the

written in the separate line.
Condition=No_Error
The First line has the CRC value of the data
File_Path=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\Document
(Sender side CRC value).
s\1 Th.txt>
The Second line has the CRC value of the
data (Receiver side CRC value).
Example:
92BF
0000

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Cyclic
Redundancy Check inside the function fnCRC () using the variables already declared.

283
To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ CrcCcitt.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To detect the error found in the file transferred between a Sender and Receiver
using CRC CCITT.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectError Detecting CodesCyclic
Redundancy Check.

Sample Input
For No Error Case -Follow the below given steps,
0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRCCCITT as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, NoError should be selected.
3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs
have to be given.

For Error Case - Follow the below given steps,

0. SampleMode should be selected.
1. SelectCRCCCITT as Algorithm from the list available.
2. Under Condition, Error should be selected.
3. Under Input, Enter the path of the file name to get its CRC. The file
should be in .txt format which should not exceed 5000bytes.
4. Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs
have to be given.

284
Sample Output
For No Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Zero when the .txtfile is
received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing from Node1 to
Node2 with NoError.
For Error Case: The CalculatedCRC should be Non-Zero when the .txt file
is received by the Node2. The message DataFrame is Flowing from Node1 to
Node2 with Error.

285
9.5.21 Error Detection Code - Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC)
Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Longitudinal Redundancy Check to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Input.txt file has the original data bits, the type of parity Output.txt file, the First line
(odd or even) and the error data bits. is the LRC bits value for the
original data bits. The Second
Parity=Odd (or Even)
line is the LRC bits value for
Data=Tetcos the error data bits.
Data_Bits_Original=0101010001100101011101000110001 00111010 - LRC bits of the
10110111101110011 original data
Data_Bits_Error=001010110100010101010100011000110 01000101 - LRC bits of the
110111101110011 error data

286
Interface Source Code
Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Longitudinal
Redundancy Check inside the function fnLRC () using the variables already declared.To view
the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ LRC.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC)

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Error Detecting Codes in that
Longitudinal redundancy Check,

Sample Input - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Parity need to be selected. Either Odd or Even can be selected.

Data need to be entered. Maximum of 8 alphabets can be entered.

Error Position needs to be selected. The value ranges from 1 to 48.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Data Bits which if in the binary form is obtained. This Data Bits is obtained for
Original Data entered as well as for the Error selected.

Depending on the Parity selected, tables of LRC of Original Data Bits and LRC
of Error Data Bits are obtained.

In each of the above mentioned tables last row would contain the Parity.

Error In Column(s) is obtained.

287
9.5.22 Framing Sequence Bit Stuffing

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Bit Stuffing to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt which is in Temporary Directory. The user program after executing the concept should
write the required output to a file named Output with extension txt in Temporary
Directory.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Output File

The Input.txt file contains, The Output.txt file contains,

Destination Address=Value Message=Value>
Source Address=Value H=Value>e=Value>l=Value>l=Value>o=Value>
Data=Message Binary Values= Value >
CRC Polynomial=Value CRC Polynomial= Value >
Error Status=0 or 1 CheckSumSender= Value >
Seed Value=Value <Stuffing>
Destination Address= Value >
Example: Source Address= Value >
Destination Address=00011111 Data= Value >
Source Address=00111111 <DeStuffing>
Data=Hello Destination Address= Value >

288
CRC Polynomial=10010 Source Address= Value >
Error Status=0 Data= Value >
Seed Value=45 Error Status= Value >
CheckSumReceiver= Value >
Binary Values= Value >
H= Value >e= Value >l= Value >l= Value >o= Value >
Message= Value >
Example:
Message=Hello>
H=72>e=101>l=108>l=108>o=111>
Binary
Values=0100100001100101011011000110110001101111>
CRC Polynomial=10011>
CheckSumSender=1110>
<Stuffing>
Destination Address=000111110>
Source Address=001111101>
Data=010010000110010101101100011011000110111110110>
<DeStuffing>
Destination Address=00011111>
Source Address=00111111>
Data=01001000011001010110110001101100011011111110>
Error Status=0>
CheckSumReceiver=0000>
BinaryValues=0100100001100101011011000110110001101111>
H=72>e=101>l=108>l=108>o=111>
Message=Hello>

289
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given. Using this, the user can write only the functions
fnBitStuffing () and fnDeStuffing (), using the variables already declared.

To view the interface source code, go to NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/
BitStuffing.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Bit Stuffing technique.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Framing Sequence Bit Stuffing.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel,

Sample mode should be selected.

Fill in the HDLC Frame fields available
o Enter the 8 binary digits in the Source Address field.
o Enter the 8 binary digits in the Destination Address field.
o Enter data, with a maximum of 5 characters
o CRC polynomial will be chosen by default and select either Error or
No Error.
Then Run button needs to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.
Output - The following steps are done internally by NetSim -
Data will be converted into ASCII Values. ASCII Values will be converted
into Binary Values.
The Binary Value for CRC polynomial will be shown.
Checksum will be calculated for the user data in Sender side.
HDLC frame will be formed in Sender side and Bit Stuffing process is
animated (Adding 0 for every consecutive five 1s).
Then Destuffing process will be animated in Receiver side.

290
 Checksum will be calculated in receiver side.
Again Binary Values will be converted into ASCII values.
Finally the ASCII values will be converted into Data which the user
entered.

291
9.5.23 Framing Sequence Character Stuffing

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Character Stuffing to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt which is in Temporary Directory

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt in Temporary Directory.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Output File

The Input.txt file contains, The Output.txt file contains,
Starting Delimiter=Value Stuffing>
Destination Address=Value Destination Address=Value>
Source Address=Value Source Address= Value>
Data=Value Data= Value>
Checksum=Value Checksum= Value>
Ending Delimiter=Value DeStuffing>
Example: Destination Address= Value>
Starting Delimiter=a Source Address= Value>
Destination Address=eraerwbr Data= Value>
Source Address=asdasdas Checksum= Value>
Data=sdfgf Example:

292
 Checksum=shfsdfsd Stuffing>
Ending Delimiter=h Destination Address=eraaerwbr>
Source Address=aasdaasdaas>
Data=sdfgf>
Checksum=shhfsdfsd>
DeStuffing>
Destination Address=eraerwbr>
Source Address=asdasdas>
Data=sdfgf>
Checksum=shfsdfsd>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given. Using this, the user can write only the functions
fnCharacterStuffing () and fnDeStuffing (), using the variables already declared. To view
the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ CharacterStuffing.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Character Stuffing technique.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Framing Sequence Character
Stuffing.

Sample Input - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,
SampleMode should be selected.
Fill in the HDLC Frame fields available.
o Starting Delimiter has to be filled in.
o Enter the 8 characters in the Destination Address field.

293
 o Enter the 8 characters in the Source Address field.
o Enter in Data field with a maximum of 8 characters.
o Enter the 8 characters in the Check Sum field.
o Ending Delimiter has to be filled in.
Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

HDLC Frame will be formed in Sender side.
Character stuffing process will be animated in Sender Side.
Then destuffing process will be animated in Receiver side.
Once the sample experiment is done Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

294
9.5.24 Virtual Scheduling Algorithm

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Virtual Scheduling Algorithm to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Input File Content This gives us the format of Output. Txt to which the
user has to write his program
PCR=1
Each value should be separated by a delimiter>.
CDVT=0.200
There should be no extra white spaces or blank lines.
Actual_Arriva_Time=0.100
Example:
Previous_Theoratical_Time=0.000
Value1>Value2>Value3>
Value1 Cell conformation Flag,
Value 2 Next Cells Expected arrival Time

295
 Value 3 Current cells Actual arrival time.
Note: The above convention to write into the
Output.Txt are mandatory.
A sample file format is as follows:3>2.000>1.000>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Longitudinal
Redundancy Check inside the void main () using the variables already declared.To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ VSA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Virtual Scheduling Algorithm.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Virtual Scheduling Algorithm,

Sample Input - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). Its value ranges from 1 to 10.

Select the Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CDVT). Its value ranges from 0.1
to 0.9.

Enter in the Actual Arrival Time.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

296
 A graph with the following information is obtained,

o Cell Confirmation,

o Actual Arrival Time,

o Expected Time (TAT)

o Whether the Cell has been discarded or successfully received. This

discarding or receiving of the cell depends on the Actual Arrival Time
entered. Go through the 3 rules given in this program.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

297
9.5.25 Address Mask

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Address mask to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Output File

This gives us the contents of the Input. Txt The Output File format
from which the user has to get the values Binary value of IP Address>
for his program
Prefix value>Suffix value>
The Input File format
Binary value of Address mask>
IP Address>
Decimal value of Address mask>.
Sample Input text Format
Sample Output text Format
Let us consider how a given input (Data
file and error index) is stored in the text 11000000 10101001 00000000 10010110 >
and read. 1>31>
IP_Address=192.169.0.150 10000000 00000000 00000000
Prefix_Value=1 0000000>128>0>0>0>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only
thefnAddressMAsk () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to
298
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ AddressMask.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of finding Address mask through programming.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the IP Address

Select the Prefix value

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are done internally,

Binary value of IP Address is obtained.

Prefix, Suffix values are obtained

Binary value of Address Mask is obtained

Decimal value of Address Mask is obtained

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

299
9.5.26 Binary Conversion

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Binary conversion to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

This gives us the contents of the Input. The Output File format
Txt from which the user has to get the First Byte value>128>Quotient of First
values for his program Byte/128>Remainder of First Byte/128>
The Input File format Previous remainder>64>Quotient of
IP Address> Previous remainder/64>Remainder of
Previous remainder /64>
Sample Input text Format
Previous remainder>32>Quotient of
IP_Address=192.168.0.100
Previous remainder/32>Remainder of
Previous remainder /32>
Previous remainder>16>Quotient of
Previous remainder/16>Remainder of
Previous remainder /16>
Previous remainder>8>Quotient of Previous
remainder/8>Remainder of Previous
remainder /8>
Previous remainder>4>Quotient of Previous
remainder/4>Remainder of Previous

300
remainder /4>
Previous remainder>2>Quotient of Previous
remainder/2>Remainder of Previous
remainder /2>
Previous remainder>1>Quotient of Previous
remainder/1>Remainder of Previous
remainder /1>.
.same procedure for all bytes
Binary value>
Sample Output text Format
192>128>1>64>
64>64>1>0>
0>32>0>0>
0>16>0>0>
0>8>0>0>
0>4>0>0>
0>2>0>0>
0>1>0>0>
168>128>1>40>
40>64>0>40>
40>32>1>8>
8>16>0>8>
8>8>1>0>
0>4>0>0>
0>2>0>0>
0>1>0>0>
0>128>0>0>
0>64>0>0>
0>32>0>0>
0>16>0>0>
0>8>0>0>
0>4>0>0>
0>2>0>0>
0>1>0>0>
100>128>0>100>
100>64>1>36>

301
 36>32>1>4>
4>16>0>4>
4>8>0>4>
4>4>1>0>
0>2>0>0>
0>1>0>0>
11000000 10101000 00000000 01100100 >

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
fnBinaryConversion () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ BinaryConversion.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of Binary conversion through programming.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the IP Address

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are done internally,

Each bit is obtained one by one.

Binary value of IP Address is obtained.

302
 Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

303
9.5.27 Classless InterDomain Routing

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Classless Inter Domain Routing to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:

The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

This gives the contents of the The Output file contains the First address, Last
Input. Txt from which the user has address, Mask, Value and Network Address of
to get the values. all the networks.
The Input File contains: First Address: The Starting Address of the
Network
Starting_IP_Address=150.0.0.0
Last Address: The last address in the Network.
No_of_Networks=3
Mask: The Mask address (Mask should be 4 byte
No_of_Hosts_in_Network_1=512
format).
No_of_Hosts_in_Network_2=1024
Number of Node: The number of nodes in the
No_of_Hosts_in_Network_3=2048

304
Host_IP_Address=150.0.1.2 network.
Value: The value will be either 0 or 1.
0 - The next line has the network address to
which the given host belongs.
1 - Means that the host does not belong to any
network.
Network Address: If the Value is 1 then the
network to which the host belongs is given.
Note: Each data will have a separate line and
each line will end with ">"
A Sample Output File Format
150.0.0.0>
150.0.1.255>
255.255.254.0>
512>
150.0.4.0>
150.0.7.255>
255.255.252.0>
1024>
150.0.8.0>
150.0.15.255>
255.255.248.0>
2048>
0>
150.0.0.0>
For each network there will be first address, last
address, mask and number of hosts. Since the
input is 3 networks, there are 3 set of outputs.
The last two lines give the details about whether
the host is present in any of the network.

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the CIDR inside
the function fnCIDR () using the variables already declared. To view the interface source
code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ CIDR.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

305
 Open file location in Windows 7
Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To Implement Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR).

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Classless InterDomain Routing,

Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Starting IP Address from the given range.

Select the No. of Networks from the given range. Maximum of 6 networks
can be selected.

Select the No. of Hosts from the given range.

Click on Add button to add the No.ofHosts onto the Hosts Field. The use of
Add button depends on the No. of Networks selected. If a new No. of Hosts
has to be added then remove button can be used.

Select the Host IP Address.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Based on the Starting IP Address a table is obtained.

There are 4 columns available in the output table, i.e. First Address, Last
Address, CIDR Mask and No. of Hosts.

The First Address of the first network would be nothing but the Starting IP
Address which is selected. No. of rows in the table depends on the No. of
Networks selected.

The Last Address depends on depends on the No. of Host selected.

306
 CIDR Mask is obtained internally by using the following formula,

CIDR Mask = 32 - (log (No. of Host) / log (2))

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

307
9.5.28 Network Address

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Network Addresses to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Output File

IP_Address=192.168.0.140 The Output File format

Prefix_Value=1 Binary value of IP Address>
Prefix value>
Binary value of Address mask>
Binary value of Network Address>
Decimal value of Network Address>.
Sample Output text Format
11000000 10101000 00000000 10001100 >1>
10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000>
10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000>
128>0>0>0>

308
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
fnNetworkAddress () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ NetworkAddress.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of finding Network Address through programming.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the IP Address

Select the Prefix value

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are done internally,

Binary value of IP Address is obtained.

Binary value of Address Mask is obtained

Binary value of Network Address is obtained

Decimal value of Network Address is obtained

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

309
9.5.29 Special Addresses

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Special Addresses to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file
named Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Output File

IP_Address=192.168.0.160 The Output File format

Prefix_Value=5 Binary value of IP Address>
32>Prefix value>Suffix value>
Binary value of Prefix Part> Binary value of
Suffix Part>
Condition number in the table>condition>
Type of address>.
Sample Output text Format
11000000 10101000 00000000 10100000 >
32>5>27>
11000>000 10101000 00000000 10100000>
It doesn't Satisfy the four conditions>
Not a special address>

310
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
fnSpecialAddress () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ HammingCode.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of Special Addresses through programming.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the IP Address in slash notation

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are done internally,

Binary value of IP Address is obtained.

Binary value of Address Mask is obtained

Prefix, Suffix values are obtained

Binary value of Prefix part and Suffix part are obtained

Type of address is obtained

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples

311
9.5.30 Subnetting

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Sub-netting to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Class=B The Output file contains the Default mask (in decimal),
Network portion of Default mask (in binary), Host portion
Network_Address=128.0.0.0
of Default mask (in binary), Subnet mask bit value, Network
No_of_Subnets=2 portion of Subnet mask (in binary), Host portion of Subnet
Host_IP_Address=128.0.0.89 mask (in binary), Subnet mask (in decimal), number of zero
in host portion, number of host in each subnet, Host address,
subnet number of the given host, subnet address of the given
host and Subnet address, Starting address, Ending address,
Broadcast address of each subnet.
The Output File format
Default mask (in decimal)>
Network portion of Default mask (in binary)>Host portion
of Default mask (in binary)>

312
 Subnet mask bit value>
Subnet mask (in decimal)>
Network portion of Subnet mask (in binary)>Host portion of
Subnet mask (in binary)>
Number of zero in host portion,>Number of host in each
subnet>
Host address>Subnet number of the given host >Subnet
address of the given host>
Subnet address>Starting address>Ending address>Broadcast
address >
.
.
.until number of subnet is reached
Sample Output text Format
255.255.0.0
11111111 11111111>00000000 00000000>
1>
255.255.128.0>
11111111 11111111 1>0000000 00000000>
15>32766>
128.0.0.89>1>128.0.0.0>
1>128.0.0.0>128.0.0.1>128.0.127.254>128.0.127.255>
2>128.0.128.0>128.0.128.1>128.0.255.254>128.0.255.255>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Leaky bucket
algorithm inside the function fnSubnet () using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Subnet.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

313
Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of Subnetting through programming.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Subnetting,

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Class Name

Select the Network Address from the given list.

Select the Number of Subnets from the given list.

Select the Host IP Address.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Subnet mask value is obtained.

Number of host in the each subnet is obtained

Subnet address, Starting address, Ending address and Broadcast address are
obtained.

Subnet address of the given Host IP address is obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

314
9.5.31 EUI-64 Interface Identifier

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for EUI 64 Interface Identifier to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Output File

IPV6_Network_Id=2000:FE21:5931:72 The Output File format

C3
MAC Address>
MAC_Address=11-11-FF-FF-12-34 First part of MAC Address>Second part of MAC
Address
FF-EE appended Address>
First byte value>Binary value of First byte>
7th bit value>Complement value of 7th bit
Complemented binary value of First byte>Hexa
decimal value of complemented binary value>
Interface Id value> Interface Id in colon notation>
IPV6 prefix value>

315
 IPV6 Address>
Sample Output text Format
11-11-FF-FF-12-34>
11-11-FF>FF-12-34>
11-11-FF-FF-FE-FF-12-34>
11>00010001>
0>1>
00010011>13>
13-11-FF-FF-FE-FF-12-
34>1311:FFFF:FEFF:1234>
2000:FE21:5931:72C3>
2000:FE21:5931:72C3:1311:FFFF:FEFF:1234>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the fnEUI64 ()
function using the variables already declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ IPV6EUI64.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of EUI 64 Interface Identifier through programming.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select IPV6 Addressing EUI 64
Interface Identifier,

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the IPV6 Network Id (IPV6 Prefix)

Enter the MAC Address.

316
 Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

MAC Address is divided into two parts

FF-FE value is appended between the two parts

Interface Identifier is found by complementing 7th bit of firs byte

IPV6 Network Id (IPV6 prefix) and Interface Identifier are combined to

produce IPV6 address

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

317
9.5.32 IPV6 Host Addresses

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for IPV6 Host Addresses to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

IPV6_Address=1111:2222: The Output File format

3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB: IPV6 Address>
CCCC:DDDD
Binary value of IPV6 Address>
Prefix_Length=12
Prefix part of IPV6 Address>Suffix part of IPV6 Address>
Prefix part of Starting Address>Suffix part of Starting
Address>
Starting Address in hexa decimal notation>
Prefix part of Ending Address>Suffix part of Ending
Address>
Ending Address in hexa decimal notation>
Sample Output text Format
1111:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>

318
 000100010001000100100010001000100011001100110011
010001000100010010101010101010101011101110111011
11001100110011001101110111011101>12>116>
000100010001>00010010001000100010001100110011001
101000100010001001010101010101010101110111011101
111001100110011001101110111011101>
000100010001>00000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000000000000>
1110:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000>
000100010001>11111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
111111111111111111111111111111111>
111F:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
fnHostAddresses () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ IPV6HostAddress.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of IPV6 Host Addresses through programming.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select IPV6 Addressing IPV6 Host
Addresses,

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Enter the IPV6 Address.

Select the Prefix length.

319
 Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

IPV6 is separated into two parts: Network Id bits (prefix) and Host Id bits
(suffix)

Starting address of the network is found by replacing each bits of suffix part
with zero

Ending address of the network is found by replacing each bits of suffix part
with one

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

320
9.5.33 IPV6 Subnetting

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for IPV6 Subnetting to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

IPV6_Address=1111:2222:3 The Output File format

333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CC Binary value of IPV6 Address>
CC:DDDD
Prefix part of IPV6 Address>Suffix part of IPV6 Address>
Prefix_Length=12
Number of subnets>number of subnet msk bit>
Number_of_Subnets=2
Prefix part of IPV6 Address>Subnet Id part of IPV6
Number_of_Level=2 address>Suffix part of IPV6 Address>
Subnets_in_Level1=2 Prefix part of IPV6 Address>Subnet Id part of IPV6
Subnets_in_Level2=4 address>Suffix part of IPV6 Address>
Prefix part of Level 1 s first subnet Address> Subnet Id part
of Level 1 s first subnet Address> Suffix part of Level 1 s
first subnet Address> Hexa decimal value of Level 1 s first
subnet address>prefix length of Level 1 s first subnet>
.
.

321
until number of subnet reached in the first level
First levels subnet number>Prefix part of Level 2 s first
subnet Address> Subnet Id part of Level 2 s first subnet
Address> Suffix part of Level 2 s first subnet Address>
Hexa decimal value of Level 2 s first subnet address>prefix
length of Level 2 s first subnet>
.
.
until the number of subnets reached in the second level of
first levels subnet
.
.
until the number of subnets reached in the first level
Sample Output text Format
1111:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>
0001000100011001001000100010001000110011001100110
1000100010001001010101010101010101110111011101111
001100110011001101110111011101>
000100010001>000100100010001000100011001100110011
0100010001000100101010101010101010111011101110111
1001100110011001101110111011101>2>1>
000100010001>0>001001000100010001000110011001100
1101000100010001001010101010101010101110111011101
111001100110011001101110111011101>
000100010001>0>001001000100010001000110011001100
1101000100010001001010101010101010101110111011101
111001100110011001101110111011101>1111:2222:3333:4
444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>13>
000100010001>1>001001000100010001000110011001100
1101000100010001001010101010101010101110111011101
111001100110011001101110111011101>1119:2222:3333:4
444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>13>
0>1111:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
0>1113:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
0>1115:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
0>1117:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
1>1119:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
1>111B:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
1>111D:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>
1>111F:2222:3333:4444:AAAA:BBBB:CCCC:DDDD>15>

322
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the
fnIPV6Subnetting () function using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ IPV6Subnetting.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of IPV6 Subnetting through programming.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select IPV6 Addressing IPV6
Subnetting,

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Enter the IPV6 Address.

Select the Prefix length.

Select the number of subnets value

Click the Add value button to add the levels

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

IPV6 is separated into two parts: prefix and suffix

Number of subnet mask id is calculated

Then Subnet Id portion is derived from suffix part

323
 Using the subnet id portion, subnets are calculated

Like that, subnets in the all levels are calculates by using the above steps

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

324
9.5.34 Leaky Bucket Algorithm

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Leaky Bucket Algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

The path of the input file and the output file can be viewed on clicking the Button Path in
NetSim.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Output File

Output_Capacity=100 Output.txt file contains three lines of data. The

data format in the output file should be as follows:
Buffer_Size=100
Output rate at 1st second >Output rate at 2nd
Input_Capacity=100,100,500,1
second>..>
00,100,100,100,100,100,100,
Discard rate at 1st second >Discard rate at 2nd
second>..>
Total number of seconds taken >
The data should be stored in the file with a delimiter
> in between.
Sample File data

325
 100>100>100>100>100>100>100>100>100>100>1
00>
0>0>300>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>
11>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Leaky bucket
algorithm inside the function fnLBA() using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ LBA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To understand the concept of Leaky Bucket Algorithm(LBA) through

programming.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming menu user has to select Leaky Bucket Algorithm.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Output Capacity from the given list of values. The value ranges
from 100 to 1000.

Select the Size of Buffer from the given list of values. The value ranges from
100 to 1000.

Enter in the Input Capacity in the fields provided. The range that can be
entered is from 100 to 1000. These values will be plotted in the graph on the
right hand side panel.

326
 Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

Once the Run button is clicked a graph with Output and Discard Rate is
obtained.

The graph explains in detail as in what is the Output and Discard Packet Rate
for the given inputs.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

327
9.5.35 Multi Level Multi Access

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Multi-Level Multi Access Protocol
to NetSim.

Pre - Condition

User written program should read the value from the Input.txt in the temporary directory
which is having input from the GUI at runtime

The output should be stored in Output.txt in the temporary directory for display.

User written program should return an integer value.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, The results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Output File

Number_of_Nodes=2 Output.txt file has the decades number, decades type,

and actual decades, node addresses
Node1_Address=250
Decade No>Decade
Node2_Address=500
Type>Decade>aderess1>adress2>
Sample Output:
0>0>0000100100>
1>1>0000000001>
2>2>0000000001>500>
3>1>0000100000>
4>2>0000000001>250>

328
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Multi-Level
Multi Access Protocol inside the function fnMLMA () using the variables already declared.
To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ MLMA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Multi Level Multi Access (MLMA).

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Multi-Level Multi -Access Protocol.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Number of Nodes need to be selected. The value ranges from 2 to 15.

Node Address has to be entered and added onto the Node Address field. The
Number of Nodes selected and the Number of Addresses added into the
Address field should match.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

An Output table is formed.

On the right hand panel an animation would play. This shows that higher the
address given to the node higher the priority that node gets. Hence the node
with the higher address would transmit the data first.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

329
9.5.36 Code Division Multiple Access

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Code Division Multiple Access to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt which is in Temporary Directory.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt in Temporary Directory.

Note:The Temporary Directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

The Input.txt file contains, No. of Transmitting MobileStations=Value>

NumberofTransmittingMobilestation MobileStation=Value>Data=Value>code=Value>En
s=Value> code=Value>Signal=Value>
MobileStation=Value>Data=Value> MobileStation=Value>Data=Value>code=Value>En
Code=Value> code=Value>Signal=Value>
MobileStation=Value>Data=Value> MobileStation=Value>Data=Value>code=Value>En
Code=Value> ecode=Value>Signal=Value
MobileStation=Value> Interference Pattern=Value>
Data=Value>Code=Value> MobileStation=Value>code=Value>Decode=Value>
Example: Data=Value>
NumberOfTransmittingMobileStatio MobileStation=Value>code=Value>Decode=Value>
ns=2> Data=Value>

330
MobileStation=1>Data=10101010> MobileStation=Value>code=Value>Decode=Value>
Code=1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1> Data=Value>
MobileStation=2>Data=11110000> Example:
Code=1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1> NumberofMobileStations=2>
MobileStation=1>Data=1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 >Code=1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 >Encode=1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 >Signal=1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -
1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 >
MobileStation=2>Data=1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 >Code=1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 >Encode=1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 >Signal=1
-1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 >
InterferencePattern=2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 -
2 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 -2
0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 0 >
MobileStation=1>Code=1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 >Decode=8
-8 8 -8 8 -8 8 -8 >Data=1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 >
MobileStation=2>Code=1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 >Decode=8
8 8 8 -8 -8 -8 -8 >Data=1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 >

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given.Using this, the user can write only the function
fnEncode () and fnDecode (), using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ CDMA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Code Division Multiple Access technique

331
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming select Multiple Access Technology Code Division
Multiple Access.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

Sample Mode should be selected

In default, the Encode operation will be enabled.

Choose the Number of Transmitting Mobile Stations.

Enter the Binary Datas as per the limits.

Choose the respective Codes for each Mobile Station.

Number of Transmitting Mobile Stations 3 (Maximum of 8 Mobile Stations)

Mobile Station Binary Data(1Byte) Code

1 01110111 11111111
2 00110011 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
3 11011101 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1

Then Run button needs to be clicked. Refresh button can be used, if new
inputs have to be given.

Output -The Output for the above sample is as follows,

In Transmitter side, the values of each Mobile Stations Binary Data, Code,
Encode and Signal are shown, if the user clicks the Mobile Station.

The Signals will be broadcast from each Mobile Stations.

The Interference Pattern will be formed in Base Station and if the user
clicks the Base Station, interference Pattern will be displayed.

332
 Decode mode needs to be selected.

In Receiver side, the Interference Pattern will be broadcasted to each

Mobile Station from the Base Station.

In Receiver side, the values of each Mobile Stations Interference Pattern,

Code, Decode and Binary Data are shown, if the user clicks the Mobile
Station.

Once the sample experiment is done Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

The Values are showed in Table.

Transmitter Side

Mobile Binary Code Encode Signal

Station Data(1Byte)
1 01110111 11111111 -1, 1, 1, 1, -1, 1, 1, -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1
1 111 11111111 1111
1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1
1111111 11111111
11111111
2 00110011 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 - -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1, 1, -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
3 11011101 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 - 1, 1, -1, 1, 1, 1, -1, 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1
1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 -
1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -
1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -
1 -1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1

333
In Base Station

Mobile Signal
Station
1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
-1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
-1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1
3 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1
1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 -1

Interference 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 3 -1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3
Pattern 1 1 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 3 -1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 3 1
1 -1 3 1 1 -1

Receiver Side

Mobile Code Decode Binary

Station Interference Pattern Data(1Byte)
1 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 3 11111111 8 8 8 8 -8 8 8 01110111
-1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 1 8
1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1
-1 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1
3 -1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3
1 1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1
-1
2 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 3 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 - -8 -8 8 8 -8 - 8 8 00110011
-1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 1 1 8
1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1
-1 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1
3 -1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3
1 1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1

334
 -1
3 1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1 3 1 1 -1 -1 1 1 -1 - 8 8 -8 8 8 8 - 11011101
-1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3 1 1 8 8
1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1
-1 -1 1 -3 -1 -1 1 -3 -1 1
3 -1 1 1 3 -1 1 1 -1 3
1 1 -1 3 1 3 1 1 -1 3 1 1
-1

335
9.5.37 Time Division Multiple Access

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Time Division Multiple Access to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt which is in Temporary Directory.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt in Temporary Directory.

Note:The Temporary Directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

The Input.txt file contains, Guard Interval =Value>Bandwidth=Value>start

time=Value >end time=Value>nouser=Value>
Bandwidth=Value>No. of
time slots=Value>Time slot channel no=Value>Bandwidth=Value>start
Length=Value>Guard time=Value>End time=Value>user=Value>
Interval=Value> Guard Interval =Value>Bandwidth=Value>start
Example: time=Value >end time=Value>nouser=Value>
BandWidth=100>TimeSlot= Guard Interval =Value>Bandwidth=Value>start
1>TimeSlotLength=100>Gua time=Value >end time=Value>nouser=Value>
rdInterval=0.0> channel no=Value>Bandwidth=Value>start
time=Value>End time=Value>user=Value>
.
.
and so on.

336
 The value of the GuardInterval is -1 and the value of the no
user is 0
Example:
GuardInterval=-
1>Bandwidth=100>StartTime=0.0>EndTime=0.0>nouser=
0>
Channelno=1>Bandwidth=100>StartTime=0.0>EndTime=
100.0>user=1>
GuardInterval=-
1>Bandwidth=100>StartTime=100.0>EndTime=100.0>no
user=0>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given.Using this, the user can write only the function
fnTDMA(), using the variables already declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ TDMA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Time Division Multiple Access technique.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available, under programming user has to select Multiple Access Technology
Time Division Multiple Access.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Enter the Value of the Bandwidth.

Enter the Value of the No. of Time Slots.

Enter the Value of the TimeSlotLength.

Enter the Value of the GuardInterval

337
 Note:

The Values entered should be within the range.

Bandwidth(kHz) 200

No. of TimeSlots 3

TimeSlotLength(s) 100

GuardInterval(s) 10

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used, if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output -The Output for the above sample is as follows,

Bandwidth is divided into Time slots called channel.

The first channel is allocated to first mobile station, second channel is

allocated to second mobile station and so on.

The first Mobile Station will access the medium in first channel time slot.

The Second Mobile Station will access the medium in second channel
time slot, and so on.
During the guard interval, No mobile station will access the medium. This
is used to avoid the collision or interference.

Finally the table will be showed.

Channel no. is obtained.

Bandwidth value is obtained.

Start Time and End Time of the Guard Interval is obtained

338
 Start Time and End Time of the channel is obtained.

Which Mobile Station is accessing the allocated time slot is obtained.

Channel number Bandwidth(kHz) Time(s) Mobile Station

0 200 0.0 5.0 0

1 200 5.0 95.0 1

0 200 95.0 100.0 0

0 200 100.0 105.0 0

2 200 105.0 195.0 2

0 200 195.0 200.0 0

0 200 200.0 205.0 0

3 200 205.0 295.0 3

0 200 295.0 300.0 0

0 200 300.0 305.0 0

1 200 305.0 395.0 1

339
9.5.38 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiple Access to NetSim.

Pre-conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txtwhich is in Temporary Directory.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txtin Temporary Directory.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

The following lines will be Parallel Data Conversion

in Input.txt file. User 1
Number of users = Value Value
User1 =Value User 2
User2 =Value
Value
User3 =Value User 3
User4 =Value Value
Number of sub carrier per User 4
user = Value
Value
Bit Mapping
Example:
User 1
Number of users = 4
Value
User1 =111111111111
User 2
User2 =010101010101
Value

340
User3 =101010101010 User 3
User4 =000000000000 Value
Number of sub carrier per User 4
user = 4 Value
SubCarrier Mapping
User 1
Value
User 2
-Value
User 3
Value
User 4
Value
SubCarrier Addition
User 1
Value
User 2
Value
User 3
Value
User 4
Value

Example:
Parallel Data Conversion
User 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
User 2
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
User 3
1 0 1 0

341
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
User 4
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
Bit Mapping
User 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
User 2
-1 1 -1 1
-1 1 -1 1
-1 1 -1 1
User 3
1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1
1 -1 1 -1
User 4
-1 -1 -1 -1
-1 -1 -1 -1
-1 -1 -1 -1
SubCarrier Mapping
User 1
sin(2PIf0t) sin(2PIf1t) sin(2PIf2t) sin(2PIf3t)
sin(2PIf0t) sin(2PIf1t) sin(2PIf2t) sin(2PIf3t)
sin(2PIf0t) sin(2PIf1t) sin(2PIf2t) sin(2PIf3t)
User 2
-sin(2PIf4t) sin(2PIf5t) -sin(2PIf6t) sin(2PIf7t)
-sin(2PIf4t) sin(2PIf5t) -sin(2PIf6t) sin(2PIf7t)
-sin(2PIf4t) sin(2PIf5t) -sin(2PIf6t) sin(2PIf7t)
User 3
sin(2PIf8t) -sin(2PIf9t) sin(2PIf10t) -sin(2PIf11t)
sin(2PIf8t) -sin(2PIf9t) sin(2PIf10t) -sin(2PIf11t)

342
 sin(2PIf8t) -sin(2PIf9t) sin(2PIf10t) -sin(2PIf11t)
User 4
-sin(2PIf12t) -sin(2PIf13t) -sin(2PIf14t) -sin(2PIf15t)
-sin(2PIf12t) -sin(2PIf13t) -sin(2PIf14t) -sin(2PIf15t)
-sin(2PIf12t) -sin(2PIf13t) -sin(2PIf14t) -sin(2PIf15t)
SubCarrier Addition
User 1
sin 2PI(f0+f1+f2+f3)t
sin 2PI(f0+f1+f2+f3)t
sin 2PI(f0+f1+f2+f3)t
User 2
sin 2PI(-f4+f5-f6+f7)t
sin 2PI(-f4+f5-f6+f7)t
sin 2PI(-f4+f5-f6+f7)t
User 3
sin 2PI(f8-f9+f10-f11)t
sin 2PI(f8-f9+f10-f11)t
sin 2PI(f8-f9+f10-f11)t
User 4
sin 2PI(-f12-f13-f14-f15)t
sin 2PI(-f12-f13-f14-f15)t
sin 2PI(-f12-f13-f14-f15)t

Interface Source Code

Interface Source code written in C is given. Using this, the user can writeonly the
fnOFDMA() and fnSubcarrierAddition() functions, using the variables already declared.To
view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path/src/Programming/OFDMA.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

343
Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access

technique

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under programming select Multiple Access Technology OFDMA

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel,

Sample Mode should be selected.

The value of Number of Users needs to be selected.
Enter the Binary Datafor each user.
Number of SubCarriers per User needs to be selected.
Then Run button needs to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs have to
be given.
Output - The following steps are done internally by NetSim
The values of each userBinary Data, Parallel Conversion, Bit Mapping, SubCarrier
Mapping&SubCarrier Addition and Transmission will be shown in the right hand side
of the screen by animation.
Once the sample experiment is done Refresh button can be clicked to create new
samples.

344
9.5.39 PC to PC Communication - Socket Programming TCP

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for PC to PC Communication Socket
programming to NetSim.

Pre Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Coding Pre Requisites:

The prerequisite for the creation of sockets in the Windows-based C complier is they must
have winsock.h header file in its standard header file folder. In order to use the commands of
the winsock.h, there must be wsock32.lib library file present in the C complier. To link
wsock32.lib, different steps have to be followed for different compilers as shown:

For Visual Studio complier 2010 (10.0 versions), the library file linkage must be
made in the following way:

345
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu or press Alt + F7

c. Then click Linker.

d. Select Input

d. Type ws2_32.lib file in the Additional Dependencies text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If you have an eclipse complier, the library linkage must be in the following way

346
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu

c. Then click C/C++ Build.

d. Select Setting.

e. Select Libraries under MinGW C Linker

f. Press add button in the Libraries (-l) window

d. Type ws2_32 file in the text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If gcc compiler is used via command prompt:

a. Set the path to Socket program location.

b. Create output file (.o file) using below command.

gcc -C Filename.c

347
 c. Create exe file (.exe file) using below command

gcc -o send send.o -lws2_32

If using Dev C++ IDE, go to Toolscompiler options and add -lws2_32 as follows
before executing:

Input File Format Output File Format

The data format in the input file is as follows, Write the received message
Server Input Ex:192.168.0.2:- Requesting for the
Protocol=TCP connection
Operation=Server
Client
Protocol=TCP
Operation=Client
Destination IP=192.168.0.132
<Client IP:-Message>
Ex: 192.168.0.2:- Requesting for the
connection

348
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the TCP Client ()
function. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SocketTCP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

349
9.5.40 PC to PC Communication - Socket Programming UDP

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for PC to PC Communication Socket
programming to NetSim.

Pre Conditions`

The user program should read the input from text file named Input with extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Coding Pre Requisites:

The prerequisite for the creation of sockets in the Windows-based C complier is they must
have winsock.h header file in its standard header file folder. In order to use the commands of
the winsock.h, there must be wsock32.lib library file present in the C complier. To link
wsock32.lib, different steps have to be followed for different compilers as shown:

For Visual Studio complier 2010 (10.0 versions), the library file linkage must be
made in the following way:

350
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu or press Alt + F7

c. Then click Linker.

d. Select Input

d. Type ws2_32.lib file in the Additional Dependencies text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If you have an eclipse complier, the library linkage must be in the following way

351
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu

c. Then click C/C++ Build.

d. Select Setting.

e. Select Libraries under MinGW C Linker

f. Press add button in the Libraries (-l) window

d. Type ws2_32 file in the text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If gcc compiler is used via command prompt:

a. Set the path to Socket program location.

b. Create output file (.o file) using below command.

gcc -C Filename.c

352
 c. Create exe file (.exe file) using below command

gcc -o send send.o -lws2_32

If using Dev C++ IDE, go to Toolscompiler options and add -lws2_32 as follows
before executing:

Input File Format Output File Format

The data format in the input file is as follows,. Write the received message
Server Input Ex:192.168.0.2:- Requesting for the
Protocol= UDP connection
Operation=Server
Client
Protocol=UDP
Operation=Client
Destination IP=192.168.0.132
<Client IP:-Message>
Ex: 192.168.0.2:- Requesting for the connection

353
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the UDP ()
functions. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SocketUDP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and Receive the data using PC to PCCommunication - SocketProgramming

How to Proceed? -Two Systems are required to perform this experiment. When one System
is in the ServerMode other should be in the Client Mode. The objective can be executed in
NetSim using the programming exercise available. In the Programming menu selectPC to
PC Communication Socket Programming.
Sample Inputs - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
Select a Protocol from the following,
o TCP
o UDP
Under Operation, Server or Client should be selected.
On the Right hand side panel there is an InputField Enter Data to be
Transmitted, where Data needs to be typed in. This Data is later sent to the
ReceiverSystem. Here Type Hello.
Under Input there are two things,
o When Operation is Client, then the ServersIPAddress (192.168.1.2)
should be given in the Server IP Address field.

354
 o When Operation is Server, then the ServersIPAddress (192.168.1.1)
would be automatically filled in the Local IP Address field.

Sample Output:
On the Right hand side panel there is an InputField ReceivedData, where Data
would get displayed. Hello is the Data that is received from the ClientSystem.
TCP
First the Server should click on the Run button after which the Client should
click on the Run button to Create the socket
Client should click on the Connect button to establish the connection with
server.
The Client should click on the Send button to transmit the data to the Server.
The Client should click on the Close button to terminate the Connection with
Server.
If the Data is successfully transmitted then the SentData would be Received in
the ServerSystem.
UDP
First the Server should click on the Run button after which the Client should
click on the Run button to Create the socket
The Client should click on the Send button to transmit the data to the Server.
The Client should click on the Close button to terminate the Connection with
Server.
If the Data is successfully transmitted then the SentData would be Received in
the ServerSystem.

355
9.5.41 PC to PC Communication Chat Application TCP

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for PC to PC Communication Socket
programming to NetSim.

Pre Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Coding Pre Requisites:

The prerequisite for the creation of sockets in the Windows-based C complier is they must
have winsock.h header file in its standard header file folder. In order to use the commands of
the winsock.h, there must be wsock32.lib library file present in the C complier. To link
wsock32.lib, different steps have to be followed for different compilers as shown:

For Visual Studio complier 2010 (10.0 versions), the library file linkage must be
made in the following way:

356
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu or press Alt + F7

c. Then click Linker.

d. Select Input

d. Type ws2_32.lib file in the Additional Dependencies text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If you have an eclipse complier, the library linkage must be in the following way

357
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu

c. Then click C/C++ Build.

d. Select Setting.

e. Select Libraries under MinGW C Linker

f. Press add button in the Libraries (-l) window

d. Type ws2_32 file in the text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If gcc compiler is used via command prompt:

a. Set the path to Socket program location.

b. Create output file (.o file) using below command.

gcc -C Filename.c

358
 c. Create exe file (.exe file) using below command

gcc -o send send.o -lws2_32

If using Dev C++ IDE, go to Toolscompiler options and add -lws2_32 as follows
before executing:

Input File Format Output File Format

The data format in the input file is as Write the received message
follows, Ex:
Receive Input Tetcos:-Hello!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Protocol=TCP
Local User Name=Tetcos
Send
Protocol=TCP
Number of Users=2
1=192.168.0.1
2=192.168.0.2
Tetcos:-Hello!!!!!!!!!!!

359
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write the TCP chat
functions. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ ChatTCP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

360
9.5.42 PC to PC Communication Chat Application UDP

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for PC to PC Communication Socket
programming to NetSim.

Pre Conditions`

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Coding Pre Requisites:

The prerequisite for the creation of sockets in the Windows-based C complier is they must
have winsock.h header file in its standard header file folder. In order to use the commands of
the winsock.h, there must be wsock32.lib library file present in the C complier. To link
wsock32.lib, different steps have to be followed for different compilers as shown:

For Visual Studio complier 2010 (10.0 versions), the library file linkage must be made in the
following way:

361
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu or press Alt + F7

c. Then click Linker.

d. Select Input

d. Type ws2_32.lib file in the Additional Dependencies text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If you have an eclipse complier, the library linkage must be in the following way

362
 a. Click Project Menu in the workspace.

b. Select properties in the pull-down menu

c. Then click C/C++ Build.

d. Select Setting.

e. Select Libraries under MinGW C Linker

f. Press add button in the Libraries (-l) window

d. Type ws2_32 file in the text box area.

e. Click OK to confirm the changes in the workspace.

If gcc compiler is used via command prompt:

a. Set the path to Socket program location.

b. Create output file (.o file) using below command.

gcc -C Filename.c

363
 c. Create exe file (.exe file) using below command

gcc -o send send.o -lws2_32

If using Dev C++ IDE, go to Toolscompiler options and add -lws2_32 as follows
before executing:

Input File Format Output File Format

The data format in the input file is as Write the received message
follows,. Ex:
Receive Input 192.168.0.2:- Requesting for the
Protocol=UDP connection
Local User Name=Tetcos
Send
Protocol=TCP
Number of Users=2
1=192.168.0.1
2=192.168.0.2
Tetcos:-Hello!!!!!!!!!!!

364
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write UDP Chat functions.
To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ ChatUDP.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and Receive the data using PC to PCCommunication Chat Application

How to Proceed? -Two to Ten Systems are required to perform this experiment.
The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise available. In the
Programming menu selectPC to PC Communication Chat Application.

Sample Inputs - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
Select a Protocol from the following,
o TCP
o UDP
On the Right hand side panel there is an InputField Send Data, where Data
needs to be typed in. This Data is later sent to the ReceiverSystem. Here Type
Hello.
On the Right hand side panel there is Receive Data, where data is received
from user. Ex. Hello
Under Input there are two things,
o Number of users must be select between one to ten
o Enter the IP address of the data where needs to be in all the column in the
input pane.

365
Sample Output:
On the Right hand side panel there is an InputField ReceivedData, where Data
would get displayed. Hello is the Data that is received from the users.
TCP
Click Run button to create the socket and start Receive Data from the users.
Click Send button to transmit the data to the users.
Click Refresh button to terminate the connection.
UDP
Click Run button to create the socket and start Receive Data from the users.
Click Send button to transmit the data to the users.

366
9.5.43 Scheduling - First In First Out (FIFO)

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Scheduling - FIFO to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The program should read the data from Input.txt file that is available in the temporary
directory.

The program should write the output data to Output.txt file that is available in the
temporary directory.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Output_Link_Capacity=100 Output.txt file format is as follows,

Nodes_Priority=8,7,6,5,4,3,2,1, Seconds>no of bits transmitted in node
1>Transmission sequence of node 1>... no of bits
Nodes_Capacity=0,0,500,0,0,0,0,0,
transmitted in node 8>Transmission sequence of
node 8>
Sample Output File
1>0>0>0>0>100>1>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>
2>0>0>0>0>100>1>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>
3>0>0>0>0>100>1>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>
4>0>0>0>0>100>1>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>
5>0>0>0>0>100>1>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>0>

367
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Scheduling
inside the function fnFIFO() using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ FIFO.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - The objective is to allocate the output capacity among the various input
capacities using First In First Out (FIFO) Scheduling algorithm.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectScheduling.

Sample Input - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
Algorithm should be selected as FirstIn First Out (FIFO).
Under Input field,
0. EnterOutputLinkCapacity which is in MBPS. The options that are
available for selecting are 100, 200, 300, 1000 MBPS. Select
400 MBPS.
1. EnterBits / Node for one second (limit 0 - 9999) in the fields available.
i.e. Node1 - 100 , Node2 - 100, .., Node8 - 100.
o The Priority for the Node needs to be given. Click to Select or Deselect
the Priority of a Node. In this Sample the Priorities are as follows,

368
 Node Priority
Number Given
1 7
2 6
3 8
4 3
5 2
6 1
7 5
8 4
Click on the Run button.

Output
Note: The Transmission of the data takes place in the following sequence. The Bits /
Node are represented in different colors. These colors indicate the order in which the
transmission takes place.

The Transmission Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8.

Seconds 1 2
Node1 0 100
Node2 0 100
Node3 100 0
Node4 0 100
Node5 0 100
Node6 100 0
Node7 100 0
Node8 100 0

369
9.5.44 Scheduling - Max - Min Fair (MMF)

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Scheduling - MMF to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The program should read the data from Input.txt file that is available in the application
path.

The program should write the output data to Output.txt file that is available in the
application path.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Output_Link_Capacity Output.txt file format is as follows.

=100 1st second >Output rate of node 1 >Priority of Node 1>..>Output
Nodes_Capacity=0,0, rate of node 8.Priority of Node8
300,0,0,0,0,0, 2nd second >Output rate of node 1 >Priority of Node 1>..>Output
rate of node 8.Priority of Node8
Nth second >Output rate of node 1 >Priority of Node 1>..>Output
rate of node 8.Priority of Node8
Sample File data
1>0.00>0>0.00>0>100.00>1>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>
2>0.00>0>0.00>0>100.00>1>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>
3>0.00>0>0.00>0>100.00>1>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>0.00>0>

370
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Scheduling
inside the function fnMMFA () using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ MMF.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - The objective is to allocate the output capacity among the various input
capacities using Max-Min Fare(MMF) Scheduling algorithm.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming menu selectScheduling.
Sample Input - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
Algorithm should be selected as Max - Min Fair (MMF).
Under Input field,
0. EnterOutputLinkCapacity which is in MBPS. The options that are available
for selecting are 100, 200, 300, 1000 MBPS. Select100MBPS.
1. EnterBits / Node for one second (limit 0 - 9999) in the fields available.
i.e. Node1 - 100 , Node2 - 100, .., Node8 - 100.
Click on the Run button.
Output
The Transmission of the data takes place in the following sequence. The Bits / Node
are represented in different colors. These colors indicate the order in which the
transmission takes place.

371
 The Transmission Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8.
Seconds 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Node1 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node2 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node3 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node4 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node5 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node6 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node7 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50
Node8 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50

372
9.5.45 Shortest Path - Floyds

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for shortest path Floyds to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The program should read the data from Input.txt file that is available in the temporary
directory.

The program should write the output data to Output.txt file that is available in the temporary
directory.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

File Format

Input file format Output file format

Algorithm=Floyds Consider the source node is 1

No_of_Router=3 Distance>0>1>2>1>2>1>
Distance: Path>0>1>2>1>4>1>
999>5>1> The first line has the all the distance
values from the source node to all the
5>999>10>
other connected nodes.
1>10>999>
The second line has the path values from
Source_Router=1 the source node to all the other nodes.
Destination_Router=3 The first line contains the values stored in
Note: the distance array (single dimensional
array) used in the algorithm.
> is the delimiter symbol, which is used
to separate each input. The second line contains the values stored
in the path array (single dimensional
array) used in the algorithm.

373
 Sample Output:
1>2>3>
1>2>
1>3>
1>
>>>
path_FS>
0>0>0>
0>0>1>
0>1>0>
distance_FS>
0>5>1>
5>0>6>
1>6>0>
Note:
The string Distance and Path in the file is
compulsory. The output must be stored in
the same format

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Scheduling
inside the function fnFloyd() using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Floyds.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

374
Sample Scenarios:

Objective - The objective is to find the Shortest Path between the two Routers using the
Floyds algorithm.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the Programming
exercise available. Under Programming Menu select Shortest Path.
Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is
available on the left hand Routing Table side a Sample Scenario is
created. The Steps involved in creating are as
follows,
Sample Mode should be selected.
Select the Algorithm as Floyds.
Number of Routers needs to be selected. Minimum of 3Routers and Maximum
of 8Routers can be selected. Let us consider 4 Routers are selected.
Source Router needs to be given. Let Router 4 be the Source Router.
Destination Router also needs to be given. Let Router 1 be the Destination
Router.
Click on 2 Routers to give the distance between those 2 Routers. A blue arrow
would be pointing from the Source Node to the Destination Node. The Distances
between the Routers that needs to be given are as follows,
1. Router 4 and Router 1 67 Km,
2. Router 4 and Router 3 46 Km,
3. Router 3 and Router 1 18 Km,
4. Router 3 and Router 2 56 Km, and
5. Router 1 and Router 2 70 Km.
Click on Run button to view the output in the Routing Table.

Output - The Output for the above Scenario is as follows,

Click the Run button to view program output.
The Output is obtained in a Routing Table. All possible Routes and the
corresponding Distance are obtained. Below is a Routing Table for the above
Inputs,

375
 Route Distance[KM]
4>1> 67
4>3>1> 64
4>3>2> 102
4>3> 46
4> 0

The ShortestPath would be highlighted in green color.

Click on Refresh Button to Refresh the screen and create fresh Scenarios.

376
9.5.46 Shortest Path - Link State

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for shortest path - Link State Routing to
NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The program should read the data from Input.txt file that is available in the temporary
directory.

The program should write the output data to Output.txt file that is available in the
temporary directory.

Note: The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Input file format Output file format

Input.txt contains the distance matrix given Consider the source node is 1
by the user, along with the source node, Distance>0>1>2>1>2>1>
destination node and the total number of
nodes. Here, we have the input as a Path>0>1>2>1>4>1>
SYMMETRIC matrix. The format of The first line has the all the distance values
input.txt is, for example, from the source node to all the other
Algorithm=Link_State connected nodes.
No_of_Router=3 The second line has the path values from
the source node to all the other nodes.
Distance:
The first line contains the values stored in
999>6>5> the distance array (single dimensional array)
6>999>7> used in the algorithm.
5>7>999> The second line contains the values stored
in the path array (single dimensional array)
Source_Router=1
used in the algorithm.
Destination_Router=2
Sample Output:
Note:

377
> is the delimiter symbol, which is used to 1>2>
separate each input. 1>3>2>
1>3>
1>
>>>
Distance>0>6>5>
Path>1000>1>1>
Note:
The string Distance and Path in the file is
compulsory. The output must be stored in
the same format.

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Scheduling
inside the function fnDijkstra() using the variables already declared. To view the interface
source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ LinkState.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - The objective is to find the Shortest Path between the two routers using the
Link State algorithm.
How to Proceed? - Under ProgrammingMenu select ShortestPath.

Sample Input - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Algorithm as RunedState.
Number of Routers needs to be selected. Minimum of 3Routers and Maximum
of 8Routers can be selected. Select 5 Routers.

378
 SourceRouter needs to be given. Let Router 5 be the SourceRouter.
DestinationRouter also needs to be given. Let Router 3 be the
DestinationRouter.
Click on 2 Routers to give the distance between those 2 Routers. A blue Line
would be pointing from the SourceNode to the DestinationNode. The Distances
between the Routers that needs to be given are as follows,
1. Router 1 and Router 2 35,
2. Router 2 and Router 3 30,
3. Router 3 and Router 4 60,
4. Router 4 and Router 1 20,
5. Router 4 and Router 5 67, and
6. Router 5 and Router 2 58.
Click on Run button to view the output in the RoutingTable.

Output - The Output for the above Scenario is as follows,

Click the Run button to view program output.
The Output is obtained in a RoutingTable. All possible Routes and the
corresponding Distance are obtained. Below is a RoutingTable for the above
Inputs,
The ShortestPath would be highlighted in Green color in the RoutingTable.
Click on RefreshButton to Refresh the screen and create fresh Scenarios.

Routing Table
Route Distance[KM]
5>2>1>4>3> 173
5>2>1>4> 113
5>2>1> 93
5>2>3> 88
5>2> 58
5>4>1>2>3> 152
5>4>1>2> 122
5>4>1> 87
5>4>3> 127
5>4> 67
5> 0

379
9.5.47 Sliding Window Protocol - Go Back N

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Go Back N to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Window Size:

The Window Size for Go Back N is 7

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Go_Back_N Value1>Value2>Value3>Value4>
Data_File=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\D Types:
ocuments\1 Th.txt>
There are five types of formats of writing in
Bit_Error_Rate=6 the output file.
Sequence_Number=3 Each format is written in specific condition,
the types are explained below.
Window_Size=7
The condition of writing the types is
explained in the algorithm.
Type1:
Value1 - "CNT",
Value 2 -output of the slidingcount function
Value 3 - "FRAMES"

380
Value 4 - "TRANSMIT"
Type2:
Value1 - "DT",
Value 2 -Frame number,
Value 3 - Frames Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type3:
Value 1 - "EV",
Value 2 - Output of the intro_error function,
Value 3 - Frame Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type4:
Value 1 - "ACK",
Value 2 - "POS",
Value 3 - Acknowledgement frames Source
Address,
Value 4 - Acknowledgement frames
Destination Address.
Type5:
Value 1 - "DEL"
Value 2 - count of frames being deleted
Value 3 - "FRAME"
Value 4 - "DELETED"
Note: The above convention to write into the
Output.Txt ismandatory.
Values in Quotes"" to be written into file
Output.Txt as it is including Case.
DT>Frame No>node1>node2> (DT denotes
Data from node 1 to node 2)
EV>Error Flag>node1>node2> (EV denotes
Error Value - i.e If the above frame has error
then set the error flag as 1 else set the flag as
0)
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
(Acknowledgement for that above frame
received is sent to node 2 to node 1)
Ex:
CNT>1>FRAMES>TRANSMIT>

381
 DT>1>node1>node2>
EV>0>node1>node2>
ACK>POS>node1>node2>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sliding
Window Protocols - Go Back N inside the function GoBackN () using the variables already
declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ GobackN_SW.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and receive the data using Sliding Window Protocol - Go BackN.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under ProgrammingMenu select Sliding WindowProtocolGo Back
N.

Sample Input - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
SelectGoBackN as Algorithm.
Create a Datafile (.txt) and save it on the disk.
Select the path of the above created Datafile (.txt) which could be Maximum
of 100000bytes.
SelectBit Error Rate (BER) as 10^-5 from the drop down menu.
SelectSequencenumber (Bits) as 3 from the drop down menu.
A default value is entered for WindowSize as 7.
1. Then Run button need to be clicked.

382
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,
2. An OutputTable is obtained when Run button is clicked. In the OutputTable,
Transmittedframe (Data and Acknowledgement) and their corresponding Counts is
obtained. The TotalCount is also obtained. The table is given below,
Output
Total data frames to be transmitted - 24
Transmitted frame Count
Data 30
Acknowledgement 5
Total = 35

Note - The Total data frames to be transmitted and Total count in the Output
table depends on size of the .txt file.
3. The details of the DataFrames flowing from Node1 to Node 2 are obtained on the
right hand side panel. Below are the details that is obtained in the tool,
o Data Frame 1 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 2 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 3 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 4 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with error.
o Data Frame 5 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 6 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 7 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with error.
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1.
o Data Frame 4 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 5 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 6 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 7 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 8 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 9 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 10 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1.
o Data Frame 11 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.

383
 o Data Frame 12 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 13 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 14 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 15 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 16 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 17 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1.
o Data Frame 18 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 19 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 20 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 21 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 22 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 23 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with error.
o Data Frame 24 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1.
o Data Frame 23 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Data Frame 24 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error.
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1.
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

384
9.5.48 Sliding Window Protocol - Selective Repeat

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Selective Repeat to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Window Size:

The Window Size for Selective Repeat is 7

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Selective_Repeat Value1>Value2>Value3>Value4>
Data_File=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar Types:
\Documents\1 Th.txt>
There are five types of formats of writing in
Bit_Error_Rate=5 the output file.
Sequence_Number=3 Each format is written in specific condition,
the types are explained below.
Window_Size=4
The condition of writing the types is
explained in the algorithm.
Type1:
Value1 - "CNT",
Value 2 - output of the slidingcount
function
Value 3 - "FRAMES"

385
 Value 4 - "TRANSMIT"
Type2:
Value1 - "DT",
Value 2 - Frame number,
Value 3 - Frames Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type3:
Value 1 - "EV",
Value 2 - Output of the intro_error function,
Value 3 - Frame Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type4:
Value 1 - "ACK",
Value 2 - "POS",
Value 3 - Acknowledgement frames
Source Address,
Value 4 - Acknowledgement frames
Destination Address.
Type5:
Value 1 - "DEL"
Value 2 - count of frames being deleted
Value 3 - "FRAME"
Value 4 - "DELETED"
Note: The above convention to write into
the Output.Txt ismandatory.
Values in Quotes"" to be written into file
Output.Txt as it is including Case.
DT>Frame No>node1>node2> (DT denotes
Data from node 1 to node 2)
EV>Error Flag>node1>node2> (EV denotes
Error Value - i.e If the above frame has
error then set the error flag as 1 else set the
flag as 0)
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
(Acknowledgement for that above frame
received is sent to node 2 to node 1)

Ex:

386
 CNT>1>FRAMES>TRANSMIT>
DT>1>node1>node2>
EV>0>node1>node2>
ACK>POS>node1>node2>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sliding
Window Protocol - Selective Repeat inside the function SelectiveRepeat () using the
variables already declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SelectiveRepeat_SW.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and receive the data using Sliding Window Protocol - Selective Repeat.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under Programming Menu select Sliding WindowProtocolSelective
Repeat.
Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
Sample Mode should be selected.
Select Selective Repeat as Algorithm.
Create a Data file (.txt) and save it on the disk.
Select the path of the above created Data file (.txt) which could be Maximum
of 100000 bytes.
Select Bit Error Rate (BER) as 10^-5 from the drop down menu.
Select Sequence number (Bits) as 3 from the drop down menu.
A default value is entered for Window Size as 4.
1. Then Run button need to be clicked.

387
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,
2. An Output Table is obtained when Run button is clicked. In the Output Table,
Transmitted frame (Data and Acknowledgement) and their corresponding Counts
is obtained. The Total Count is also obtained. The table is given below,

Output
Total data frames to be transmitted - 24
Transmitted frame Count
Data 26
Acknowledgement 7
Total = 33

Note - The Total data frames to be transmitted and Total count in the
Output table depends on size of the .txt file.
3. The details of the Data Frames flowing from Node 1 to Node 2 are obtained on the
right hand side panel. Below are the details that is obtained in the tool,
o Data Frame 1 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 2 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 3 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 4 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 4 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 5 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 6 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with error
o Data Frame 7 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 6 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 8 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 9 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 10 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 11 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error

388
 o Data Frame 12 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 13 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 14 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 15 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 16 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 17 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 18 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 19 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 20 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 21 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 22 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
o Data Frame 23 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Data Frame 24 is flowing from Node1 to Node2 with no error
o Acknowledgement from Node2 to Node1
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

389
9.5.49 Sorting Technique - Bubble Sort

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Sorting Algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Condition

User written program should read the value from the Input.txt in the temporary directory
which is having input from the GUI at runtime

The output should be stored in Output.txt in the temporary directory for display.

User written program should return an integer value.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, The results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Ascending Order type>index 1>index 2>

Sorting_Type=Bubble type 0 : specifies Positioning the data value
index that ha
Sorting_Order=Ascending
type 1 : specifies the two index following it
Total_Number=3
are being compared
Number_to_Sort=5,4,3
type 2 : specifies the two index following it
Descending Order are being swapped
Sorting_Type=Bubble The following types are used in Quick Sort :
Sorting_Order=Descending type 3 : specifies the two index, where index
Total_Number=3 1 value is copied to index 2 value.
Number_to_Sort=4,5,6 type 4 : specifies the two index, where
Position data index value of index1 is copied

390
 to the index 2 value.
index 1 : index 1 is the index of array that
points to the first data that is being swapped
or compared.
index 2 : index 2 is the index of array that
points to the second data that is being
swapped or compared.
Sample Output:
Ascending Order:
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
1>1>2>
2>1>2>
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
Descending Order:
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
1>1>2>
2>1>2>
1>0>1>
2>0>1>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sorting
Algorithm inside the function fnBubblesort () using the variables already declared. To view
the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ BubbleSort.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

391
Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Sorting Techniques.

How to Proceed? -

The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise available, under
programming user has to select Sorting Techniques.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Bubble Sort as Sorting Type.

Select the Sorting Order as either Ascending or Descending.

Select the total number that has to be sorted. The values available are from 3
to 25.

Enter the Number Value in the field provided. The value entered should be
within the range of 1 to 9999.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

According to the Sorting Type selected the Output would vary.

Number of Comparison would be obtained.

Number of Swapping would be obtained.

A table with the values tabulated would be obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

392
9.5.50 Sorting Technique - Insertion Sort

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Sorting Algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Condition

User written program should read the value from the Input.txt in the temporary directory
which is having input from the GUI at runtime

The output should be stored in Output.txt in the temporary directory for display.

User written program should return an integer value.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, The results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Ascending Order type>index 1>index 2>

Sorting_Type=Insertion type 0 : specifies Positioning the data
value index that ha
Sorting_Order=Ascending
type 1 : specifies the two index
Total_Number=3
following it are being compared
Number_to_Sort=9,8,7
type 2 : specifies the two index
following it are being swapped
Descending Order The following types are used in Quick
Sorting_Type=Insertion Sort :

Sorting_Order=Descending type 3 : specifies the two index, where

index 1 value is copied to index 2 value.
Total_Number=3
type 4 : specifies the two index, where

393
 Number_to_Sort=1,9,3 Position data index value of index1 is
copied to the index 2 value.
index 1 : index 1 is the index of array
that points to the first data that is being
swapped or compared.
index 2 : index 2 is the index of array
that points to the second data that is
being swapped or compared.
Sample Output:
Ascending Order:
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
1>1>2>
2>1>2>
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
Descending Order:
1>0>1>
2>0>1>
1>1>2>
2>1>2>
1>0>1>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sorting
Algorithm inside the function fnInsertsort () using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ InsertionSort.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Project:

Objective - To study the working of Sorting Techniques.

394
How to Proceed? -

The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise available, under
programming user has to select Sorting Techniques.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Insertion Sort as Sorting Type.

Select the Sorting Order as either Ascending or Descending.

Select the total number that has to be sorted. The values available are from 3
to 25.

Enter the Number Value in the field provided. The value entered should be
within the range of 1 to 9999.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

According to the Sorting Type selected the Output would vary.

Number of Comparison would be obtained.

Number of Swapping would be obtained.

A table with the values tabulated would be obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

395
9.5.51 Sorting Technique - Quick Sort

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Sorting Algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Condition

User written program should read the value from the Input.txt in the temporary directory
which is having input from the GUI at runtime

The output should be stored in Output.txt in the temporary directory for display.

User written program should return an integer value.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and, The results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Ascending Order type>index 1>index 2>

Sorting_Type=Quick type 0 : specifies Positioning the data
value index that ha
Sorting_Order=Ascending
type 1 : specifies the two index
Total_Number=3
following it are being compared
Number_to_Sort=33,22,66
type 2 : specifies the two index
following it are being swapped
Descending Order The following types are used in Quick
Sorting_Type=Quick Sort :

Sorting_Order=Descending type 3 : specifies the two index, where

index 1 value is copied to index 2 value.
Total_Number=3

396
 Number_to_Sort=22,33,44 type 4 : specifies the two index, where
Position data index value of index1 is
copied to the index 2 value.
index 1 : index 1 is the index of array
that points to the first data that is being
swapped or compared.
index 2 : index 2 is the index of array
that points to the second data that is
being swapped or compared.
Sample Output:
Ascending:
0>0>0>
1>0>2>
3>1>0>
4>0>1>
0>2>2>
0>0>0>
Descending:
0>0>0>
3>2>0>
1>0>1>
4>0>2>
0>0>0>
1>0>1>
4>0>0>
0>1>1>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sorting
Algorithm inside the function fnQuicksort () using the variables already declared. To view
the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ QuickSort.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista

397
 Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Sorting Techniques.

How to Proceed? -

The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise available, under
programming user has to select Sorting Techniques.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Quick Sort as Sorting Type.

Select the Sorting Order as either Ascending or Descending.

Select the total number that has to be sorted. The values available are from 3
to 25.

Enter the Number Value in the field provided. The value entered should be
within the range of 1 to 9999.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

According to the Sorting Type selected the Output would vary.

Number of Comparison would be obtained.

Number of Swapping would be obtained.

A table with the values tabulated would be obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

398
9.5.52 Sorting Technique - Selection Sort

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Sorting Algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Condition

User written program should read the value from the Input.txt in the temporary directory
which is having input from the GUI at runtime

The output should be stored in Output.txt in the temporary directory for display.

User written program should return an integer value.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and the results of the program should be written into the
output file Output.txt.

Note:The naming of the input and the output file must be same as the text displayed in the
Methodology screen

File Format

Input File Format Output File Format

Ascending Order type>index 1>index 2>

Sorting_Type=Selection type 0 : specifies Positioning the data
value index that ha
Sorting_Order=Ascending
type 1 : specifies the two index
Total_Number=3
following it are being compared
Number_to_Sort=88,77,66
type 2 : specifies the two index
following it are being swapped
Descending Order The following types are used in Quick
Sorting_Type=Selection Sort :

Sorting_Order=Descending type 3 : specifies the two index, where

index 1 value is copied to index 2 value.
Total_Number=3
type 4 : specifies the two index, where

399
 Number_to_Sort=55,11,22 Position data index value of index1 is
copied to the index 2 value.
index 1 : index 1 is the index of array
that points to the first data that is being
swapped or compared.
index 2 : index 2 is the index of array
that points to the second data that is
being swapped or compared.
Sample Output:
Ascending:
0>0>0>
1>1>0>
0>1>1>
1>2>1>
0>2>2>
2>0>2>
0>1>1>
1>2>1>
Descending:
0>0>0>
1>1>0>
1>2>0>
0>1>1>
1>2>1>
0>2>2>
2>1>2>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Sorting
Algorithm inside the function select() using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SelectionSort.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

400
 Open file location in Windows 7
Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To study the working of Sorting Techniques.

How to Proceed? -

The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming exercise available, under
programming user has to select Sorting Techniques.

Sample Inputs - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,

SampleMode should be selected.

Select the Selection Sort as Sorting Type.

Select the Sorting Order as either Ascending or Descending.

Select the total number that has to be sorted. The values available are from 3
to 25.

Enter the Number Value in the field provided. The value entered should be
within the range of 1 to 9999.

Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

According to the Sorting Type selected the Output would vary.

Number of Comparison would be obtained.

Number of Swapping would be obtained.

A table with the values tabulated would be obtained.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

401
9.5.53 Spanning Tree Borovska

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Spanning Tree using Borovska
algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Borovska Output.txt file has the edges in the

spanning tree, which is selected from
No_of_Switches=3
the input edges.
No_of_Edges=3
Node1>Node2>Cost>
Source_Switch=3,Destination_Switch=1,
Example:
Distance=11,
1>2>22>
Source_Switch=1,Destination_Switch=2,
Distance=22, 1>3>11>
Source_Switch=3,Destination_Switch=2,
Distance=33,

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given .Using this the user can write only the Borovska
algorithm inside the function fnBorovska() using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

402
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Boruvska.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To find a SpanningTree for a network using Borovskas algorithm.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming Menu selectSpanning Tree.

Sample Input

SampleMode should be selected.

SelectBorovska as Algorithm from the list available.

Select the Number of Switches. Select 4 Switches as an Input.

Click on 2 Switches to give the distance between them. Similarly connect all the
Switches that are available in the network. The Distances between the Routers
that needs to be given are as follows,

o Switch 1 and Switch 2 67 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 4 46 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 3 89 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 3 78 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 4 99 Km

o Switch 3 and Switch 4 56 Km

Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs have
to be given.

Sample Output

The SpanningTreeTable with the Path (Source Switch and Destination Switch)
and Distance is obtained. Below is the Table that is obtained for the above inputs,

403
 Spanning Tree Table

Path Distance[KM]

1 2 67
3 4 56
1 4 46
The Length of the SpanningTree (KM) would be given below in the output
panel. The SpanningTreePath consists of green lines, whereas the Non-
SpanningTree consists of red lines. Here in this Sample, Length of the
Spanning Tree (KM) 169.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

404
9.5.54 Spanning Tree Kruskal

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Spanning Tree using Kruskal
algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Kruskal's Output.txt file has the edges

in the spanning tree, which is
No_of_Switches=3
selected from the input edges.
No_of_Edges=3
Node1>Node2>Cost>
Source_Switch=3,Destination_Switch=1,Distance=23,
Example:
Source_Switch=1,Destination_Switch=2,Distance=34,
3>1>23>
Source_Switch=3,Destination_Switch=2,Distance=45,
1>2>34>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given .Using this the user can write only the Kruskal
algorithm inside the function fnKruskal() using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Kruskal.c

405
To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To find the SpanningTree for a network by using Kruskal algorithm.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming Menu selectSpanning Tree.

Sample Input

SampleMode should be selected.

SelectKruskal as Algorithm from the list available.

Select the Number of Switches. Select 4 Switches as an Input.

Click on 2 Switches to give the distance between them. Similarly connect all the
Switches that are available in the network. The Distances between the Routers
that needs to be given are as follows,

o Switch 1 and Switch 2 67 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 4 46 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 3 89 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 3 78 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 4 99 Km

o Switch 3 and Switch 4 56 Km

Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs have
to be given.

Sample Output

The SpanningTreeTable with the Path (Source Switch and Destination Switch)
and Distance is obtained. Below is the Table that is obtained for the above inputs,

406
 Spanning Tree Table

Path Distance[KM]
1 4 46
4 3 56
1 2 67

The Length of the SpanningTree (KM) would be given below in the output
panel. The SpanningTree Path consists of green lines, whereas the Non-
SpanningTree consists of red lines. Here in this Sample, Length of the
SpanningTree (KM) 169

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

407
9.5.55 Spanning Tree Prims

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Spanning Tree using Prims
algorithm to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the input scenario from text file named Input with extension
txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Prim's Output.txt file has the edges in the

spanning tree, which is selected
No_of_Switches=3
from the input edges.
No_of_Edges=3
Node1>Node2>Cost>
Source_Switch=1
Example:
Source_Switch=3,Destination_Switch=1,Distance=44,
1>3>44>
Source_Switch=1,Destination_Switch=2,Distance=55,
1>2>55>
Source_Switch=2,Destination_Switch=3,Distance=66,

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given .Using this the user can write only the Prims
algorithm inside the function fnPrims() using the variables already declared. To view the
interface source code, go to

408
NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ Prims.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - To find a SpanningTree for a network using Prims algorithm.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. In the Programming Menu selectSpanning Tree.

Sample Input

SampleMode should be selected.

SelectPrims as Algorithm from the list available.

Select the Number of Switches. Select 4 Switches as an Input.

Click on 2 Switches to give the distance between them. Similarly connect all the
Switches that are available in the network. The Distances between the Routers
that needs to be given are as follows,

o Switch 1 and Switch 2 67 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 4 46 Km

o Switch 1 and Switch 3 89 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 3 78 Km

o Switch 2 and Switch 4 99 Km

o Switch 3 and Switch 4 56 Km

SourceSwitch can be any 1 from list.Here, SourceSwitch is selected as3.

Click on Run button to execute. Refresh button can be used if new Inputs have
to be given.

409
Sample Output

The SpanningTreeTable with the Path (SourceSwitch and Destination Switch)

and Distance is obtained. Below is the Table that is obtained for the above inputs,

SpanningTreeTable

Path Distance[KM]
3 4 56
4 1 46
1 2 67

The Length of the SpanningTree (KM) would be given below in the output
panel. The SpanningTree Path consists of green lines, whereas the Non-
SpanningTree consists of red lines. Here in this Sample, Length of the
Spanning Tree (KM) 169.

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
New Samples.

410
9.5.56 Transmission Flow Control - Go Back N

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Go Back N to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Window Size:

The Window Size for Go Back N is 7

Input File Format Output File Format

Algorithm=Go_Back_N Value1>Value2>Value3>Value4>
Data_File=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\ Types:
Documents\1 Th.txt> There are five types of formats of writing in
BER=0 the output file.
Each format is written in specific condition,
the types are explained below.
The condition of writing the types is
explained in the algorithm.
Type1:
Value1 - "CNT",
Value 2 - output of the slidingcount function
Value 3 - "FRAMES"

411
Value 4 - "TRANSMIT"
Type2:
Value1 - "DT",
Value 2 - Frame number,
Value 3 - Frames Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type3:
Value 1 - "EV",
Value 2 - Output of the intro_error function,
Value 3 - Frame Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type4:
Value 1 - "ACK",
Value 2 - "POS",
Value 3 - Acknowledgement frames Source
Address,
Value 4 - Acknowledgement frames
Destination Address.
Type5:
Value 1 - "DEL"
Value 2 - count of frames being deleted
Value 3 - "FRAME"
Value 4 - "DELETED"
Note: The above convention to write into the
Output.Txt is mandatory.
Values in Quotes"" to be written into file
Output.Txt as it is including Case.
DT>Frame No>node1>node2> (DT denotes
Data from node 1 to node 2)
EV>Error Flag>node1>node2> (EV denotes
Error Value - i.e If the above frame has error
then set the error flag as 1 else set the flag as
0)
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
(Acknowledgement for that above frame
received is sent to node 2 to node 1)
Ex: CNT>1>FRAMES>TRANSMIT>
DT>1>node1>node2>

412
 EV>0>node1>node2>
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
DEL>1>FRAME>DELETED>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Transmission
Flow Control - Go Back N inside the function GoBackN () using the variables already
declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ GoBackN_TFC.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and receive the data using Transmission Flow Control - Go BackN.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under ProgrammingMenu select Transmission Flow ControlGo
Back N.
Sample Input - By using the InputPanel that is available on the left hand side a
SampleScenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
SampleMode should be selected.
SelectGoBackN as Algorithm.
Create a Datafile (.txt) and save it on the disk.
Select the path of the above created Datafile (.txt) which could be Maximum
of 100000bytes.
SelectBit Error Rate (BER) as 10^-5 from the drop down menu.
1. Then Run button need to be clicked.
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,
2. An OutputTable is obtained when Run button is clicked. In the OutputTable,
Transmittedframe (Data and Acknowledgement) and their corresponding
Counts is obtained. The TotalCount is also obtained. The table is given below,

413
 Output
Total data frames to be transmitted - 24
Transmitted frame Count
Data 30
Acknowledgement 5
Total = 35

Note - The Total data frames to be transmitted and Total count in the Output
table depends on size of the .txt file.
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

414
9.5.57 Transmission Flow Control - Selective Repeat

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Selective Repeat to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Window Size:

The Window Size for Selective Repeat is 7

Output File Format

Input File Format

Algorithm=Selective_Repeat Value1>Value2>Value3>Value4>
Data_File=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\ Types:
Documents\1 Th.txt> There are five types of formats of writing in the
BER=0 output file.
Each format is written in specific condition, the
types are explained below.
The condition of writing the types is explained
in the algorithm.
Type1:
Value1 - "CNT",
Value 2 - output of the slidingcount function
Value 3 - "FRAMES"

415
Value 4 - "TRANSMIT"
Type2:
Value1 - "DT",
Value 2 - Frame number,
Value 3 - Frames Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type3:
Value 1 - "EV",
Value 2 - Output of the intro_error function,
Value 3 - Frame Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type4:
Value 1 - "ACK",
Value 2 - "POS",
Value 3 - Acknowledgement frames Source
Address,
Value 4 - Acknowledgement frames
Destination Address.
Type5:
Value 1 - "DEL"
Value 2 - count of frames being deleted
Value 3 - "FRAME"
Value 4 - "DELETED"
Note: The above convention to write into the
Output.Txt is mandatory.
Values in Quotes"" to be written into file
Output.Txt as it is including Case.
DT>Frame No>node1>node2> (DT denotes
Data from node 1 to node 2)
EV>Error Flag>node1>node2> (EV denotes
Error Value - i.e If the above frame has error
then set the error flag as 1 else set the flag as 0)
ACK>POS>node2>node1> (Acknowledgement
for that above frame received is sent to node 2
to node 1)
Ex:
CNT>1>FRAMES>TRANSMIT>

416
 DT>1>node1>node2>
EV>0>node1>node2>
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
DEL>1>FRAME>DELETED>

Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Transmission
Flow Control -Selective Repeat inside the function SelectiveRepeat () using the variables
already declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ SelectiveRepeat_TFC.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and receive the data using Transmission Flow Control - Selective Repeat.
How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under Programming Menu select Transmission Flow
ControlSelective Repeat.

Sample Input - By using the Input Panel that is available on the left hand side a Sample
Scenario is created. The Steps involved in creating are as follows,
Sample Mode should be selected.
Select Selective Repeat as Algorithm.
Create a Data file (.txt) and save it on the disk.
Select the path of the above created Data file (.txt) which could be Maximum
of 100000 bytes.
Select Bit Error Rate (BER) as 10^-5 from the drop down menu.
1. Then Run button need to be clicked.
Output - Output for the above Sample is as follows,

417
 2. An Output Table is obtained when Run button is clicked. In the Output Table,
Transmitted frame (Data and Acknowledgement) and their corresponding
Counts is obtained. The Total Count is also obtained. The table is given below,

Output
Total data frames to be transmitted -
Transmitted frame Count
Data
Acknowledgement
Total =

Note - The Total data frames to be transmitted and Total count in the Output table
depends on size of the .txt file.
Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to create
new samples.

418
9.5.58 Transmission Flow Control - Stop and Wait

Programming Guidelines

This section guides the user to link his/her own code for Stop and Wait to NetSim.

Pre - Conditions

The user program should read the inputted scenario from text file named Input with
extension txt.

The user program after executing the concept should write the required output to a file named
Output with extension txt.

Note:The temporary directory is navigated through the following step.

Run Type "%temp%" NetSim "Input.txt" and "Output.txt"

General Program Flow

The program begins with the Reading of the Inputs from the input file Input.txt.

Executing the required concept and,

The results of the program should be written into the output file Output.txt.

Output File Format

Input File Format

Algorithm=Stop_and_Wait Value1>Value2>Value3>Value4>
Data_File=C:\Users\P.Sathishkumar\ Types:
Documents\1 Th.txt> There are five types of formats of writing in
BER=0 the output file.
Each format is written in specific condition,
the types are explained below.
The condition of writing the types is explained
in the algorithm.
Type1:
Value1 - "CNT",
Value 2 - output of the slidingcount function
Value 3 - "FRAMES"
Value 4 - "TRANSMIT"
Type2:
Value1 - "DT",

419
Value 2 - Frame number,
Value 3 - Frames Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type3:
Value 1 - "EV",
Value 2 - Output of the intro_error function,
Value 3 - Frame Source address,
Value 4 - Frames Destination address.
Type4:
Value 1 - "ACK",
Value 2 - "POS",
Value 3 - Acknowledgement frames Source
Address,
Value 4 - Acknowledgement frames
Destination Address.
Type5:
Value 1 - "DEL"
Value 2 - count of frames being deleted
Value 3 - "FRAME"
Value 4 - "DELETED"
Note: The above convention to write into the
Output.Txt is mandatory.
Values in Quotes"" to be written into file
Output.Txt as it is including Case.
DT>Frame No>node1>node2> (DT denotes
Data from node 1 to node 2)
EV>Error Flag>node1>node2> (EV denotes
Error Value - i.e If the above frame has error
then set the error flag as 1 else set the flag as
0)
ACK>POS>node2>node1>
(Acknowledgement for that above frame
received is sent to node 2 to node 1)
Ex:
DT>1>node1>node2>
EV>0>node1>node2>
ACK>POS>node2>node1>

420
Interface Source Code

Interface source code written in C is given using this the user can write only the Transmission
Flow Control - Stop and Wait inside the function stopandwait() using the variables already
declared. To view the interface source code, go to

NetSim Installation path / src / Programming/ StopandWait.c

To find NetSims Installation path right click NetSim icon and select

Open file location in Windows 7

Open file location in Windows Vista
Properties find target in Windows XP.

Sample Scenarios:

Objective - Send and receive the data using Transmission Flow Control Stop and wait.

How to Proceed? - The objective can be executed in NetSim using the programming
exercise available. Under Programming Menu select Transmission Flow Control Stop
and wait.

Sample Input - In the Input panel the following steps need to be done,
SampleMode should be selected.
Stop and Wait needs to be selected for Algorithm.
The path of the Data file (.txt) should be entered.
Bit Error Rate (BER) should be selected.
Then Run button need to be clicked. Refresh button can be used if new
Inputs have to be given.

Output - The following steps are under gone internally,

When the Run Button is clicked the Tool generates the Output in the following
format,

421
 Output
Total data frames to be transmitted
Transmitted frame Count
Data
Acknowledgement
Total =

Once the sample experiment is done, then Refresh button can be clicked to
create New Samples.

422
9.6 Programming exercise - How to practice without NetSim

Step 1: Copy Interface Source Code

Click on Interface Source Code and save the code in a text file.

For Example:

As an example, Shortest Path programming

exercise is being considered.

Open the programming exercise and select

Interface Source Code.

Save the Interface source code in another txt

file.

Step 2: Create Input.txt file

Create a new text file with the name Input.txt.

The contents of the file will vary for each programming exercises and are specified in NetSim
User Manual under programming topic.

For Example:

Copy the input file contents from NetSim user manual and save it in a file called Input.txt

423
Sample:

Algorithm=Link_State
No_of_Router=3
Distance:
999>6>5>
6>999>7>
5>7>999>
Source_Router=1
Destination_Router=2

Save it in some other location. In this example, it is saved at D:\New.

Step 3: Create .exe file

Open C editor and write the Interface source code which was saved in the first text file. Also
add the code to be written by the user in the specific sections and compile it. Keep the .exe
file.

For Example:

Now in C editor (Dev C++ IDE is used here), copy the interface source code. In the interface
source code, void fnDijkstra() is not implemented.

424
After writing the code for the function void fnDijkstra(), create .exe file. The procedure to
create .exe file is explained in Section 9.2 of NetSim User Manual.

In this example, the exe file created is LinkState.exe

Step 4: Run in command prompt

Open command prompt, and go to the folder where the .exe file is saved.

There type

<EXE Name> <blank> <Path where Input.txt is saved>;

For Example:

In this example, the exe file LinkState.exe and Input.txt is present at D:\New. So in
command prompt go to the folder where exe file is saved.

425
NOTE: For Chat programming exercise, type
For Sender: <EXE Name> <blank> <Path where Input.txt is saved> send
For Receiver: <EXE Name> <blank> <Path where Input.txt is saved> receive

Step 5: Check the output.txt file

After running in the command prompt, Output.txt file will be created at the same location
where Input.txt file is saved. User can compare and check the content of Output.txt file with
the NetSim user manual.

For Example: Here according to this example, the Output.txt file will be created at
D:\New folder. User can open the file and compare the content with NetSim user manual.

426
10 NetSim Emulator
NOTE: Emulator will be featured in NetSim only if Licenses for Emulator Add-on is available

10.1 Introduction
A network simulator mimics the behavior of networks but cannot connect to real networks.
NetSim Emulator enables users to connect NetSim simulator to real hardware and interact
with live applications.

10.1.1 Emulation: How Simulation interacts with the real world

A real PC (running NetSim Emulation Client) sends live traffic to the PC (running NetSim
Emulation Server). Whenever a packet arrives at the interface of server, this packet is
modulated into a simulation packet and sent from a source node (user selectable) in the
simulated network (user configurable) to a destination node (again user selectable). Upon
receipt of this packet at the destination, the packet is then de-modulated and sent back to a
real PC destination node (running NetSim Emulation Client). The real packet thus undergoes
network effects such as delay, loss, error etc. created virtually by NetSim Simulator.

427
10.2 Emulation Set-up:
The ideal set-up to run emulation would be to have a minimum of three (3) PCs. One would
be the real source, the second would run NetSim emulation server, and the third would be the
real destination.

Alternately, this set-up can also be managed where the two (2) PC's are running client
applications that communicate with the central server, where NetSim Emulation server is
running.

10.2.1 Setting up the NetSim Server:

Run NetSim in Administrative Mode (Right Click on NetSim.exe Run as

Administrator).
User has to open any Stack based Network (Any network except Legacy Networks,
Wireless Sensor Network, Zigbee Network and Cellular Network) in NetSim with
Emulation.
Create a network scenario of your choice (refer application examples provided) and
set the Application properties.

In the Application Properties, set Application Type as EMULATION.

Assign real Source IP address and Destination IP address in the respective fields.
Then Click Accept.

428
 Set the Simulation Time as how long you want to perform the Emulation in
Real World. Do not run the simulation until setting up Emulation in the Client
system.

NOTE: If the Emulation Server is located in a different subnet from clients

User has to configure the router settings of the real-world network so as to allow the
packets to be transmitted to the Emulation Server
For Example, if we consider a sample real world network scenario where the
Emulation clients and server are located in different subnets

Before Router C re-configuration

After Router C re-configuration

Routing table of router C needs to be configured such that any packet having Source
Address as IP Address of Node 6 (Client Source) and Destination Address as IP
Address of Node 8 (Client Destination) must be routed to Emulation Server. NetSim
configuration will the ensure that the packet is re-injected with destination set to the
appropriate IP Address (set in the application properties)

10.2.2 Setting up the NetSim Client:

Open command prompt in administrative mode.

Type command
route delete <Network Address>

429
 , then press Enter key. You will get OK. For example if your IP address is
192.168.0.4 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 then the network address is
192.168.0.0 (Got by performing a bitwise AND of the IP Address and the subnet
mask)

Type command

route add <Network Address>mask 255.255.255.0 <IP Address where

NetSim Emulation server is running> metric 1

, here the subnet mask is taken as 255.255.255.0). After execution, you will get OK.

Type command
netstat r
to check if the IP configuration is done or not.

Note that in the above screenshot, for the network 192.168.0.0, the gateway address assigned
is 192.168.0.87 (Address of the system where NetSim Emulation Server is running).

430
10.2.3 Setting multiple Virtual Machines (VM) to act as Nodes for
Emulation
NOTE - VM enabled license are required

10.2.3.1 VMs sharing the same network as the host.

A computer on which one or more virtual machines are running is defined as a Host Machine.
Each virtual machine is called a Guest Machine. In this scenario, we have 3 VMs running in a
Host Machine VM1, VM2 and VM3. Users can run NetSim License server in any system
connected to the network in which Host Machine is running.

Now right click on each VM and select Settings. Click on Network Adapter, and select
Bridged: Connected directly to the physical network. Also enable the Replicate
Physical network connection state.

An advantage of this technique is that, if the license server is running in another system,
connected to the same network as the original host, then NetSim running in the VM can
obtain the licenses.

431
10.2.3.2 VMs sharing a network but insulated from the host network.

A computer on which one or more virtual machines are running is defined as a Host Machine.
Each virtual machine is called a Guest Machine. In this scenario, we have 3 VMs running in a
Host Machine VM1, VM2 and VM3. NetSim License server is running in one of these 3
VMs.

If user needs to create an internal network which is segregated from host network, follow the
steps

1. Right click on each VM and select Settings

2. Click on Network Adapter, and select Custom: Specific Virtual network
3. Select VMnet8 (NAT)

By default, a network address is assigned to this segregated network by VMware. To

configure this IP address, go to EDIT Virtual Network Editor

432
User can modify the Subnet IP and Subnet Mask to suit their own preference.

The disadvantage of this technique is that, if the license server must compulsorily run in the
VM for NetSim to obtain the licenses.

433
10.3 Emulation examples in NetSim

10.3.1 Example Application 1 PING (One way Communication)

10.3.1.1 Steps at Emulation Server:

I. Run NetSim in Administrative Mode and create a basic network Scenario in any stack
based protocol (Any network except Legacy Networks, Wireless Sensor Network,
Zigbee Network and Cellular Network) in NetSim. Screenshot of a sample scenario in
Internetworks is shown below

II. Go to Properties of Link1 and Link2 and set Uplink and Downlink Delay to 5000.
Click and drop the Application. Right click Application select Properties.
III. In the Application Type select Emulation.
IV. Select Source and Destination ID according to the network scenario and change the
Source and Destination IP address according to the IP address of the real system.

V. Provide the Simulation Time as how long you want the Emulation to be performed.
Make sure client system(s) are ready and then click Run Simulation.

434
10.3.1.2 Steps at Source PC:

1. Before running simulation, start pinging the Destination from Source using command
ping <Destination_IP> t and note down the time duration.

2. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim

Client.
3. Perform the steps at Emulation Server as provided and simulate. During simulation,
ping the destination system. You will notice that the present time duration is higher
than the earlier ping results. This is because the network created in NetSim has link
propagation delay. Also Wireshark (if installed) will automatically start capturing the
packets as soon as Emulation Server starts simulation .

(NOTE: In case if no ping messages can be sent from source to destination, disable
windows firewall and try again.)

4. The impact of the link propagation delay in NetSim Emulator is seen on a real packet.

435
10.3.2 Example Application 1 PING (Two way Communication)

In PING (Two way communication), almost all the steps are same as PING (One way
communication), except that in NetSim Emulation server there will be two application
instead of one. One Application will be directed from Source to Destination node, while the
other application will be directed from Destination to Source node.

The difference caused in the network behavior is that in the first case (PING -One way
communication), the PING reply packets were not routed via NetSim Emulator. But in the
second case (PING -Two way communication), the PING reply packets will be routed via
NetSim Emulator, thereby the total delay will be approximately 21millisecond.

436
10.3.3 Example Application 2 Video (One way Communication)
10.3.3.1 Steps at NetSim Emulation Server:

I. Run NetSim in Administrative Mode and create a basic network Scenario in any stack
based protocol (Any network except Legacy Networks, Wireless Sensor Network,
Zigbee Network and Cellular Network) in NetSim. Screenshot of a sample scenario in
Internetworks is shown below

II. Click and drop the Application. Right click Application select Properties.
III. In the Application Type select Emulation.
IV. Select Source and Destination ID according to the network scenario and change the
Source and Destination IP address according to the IP Address of the real system and
click accept.

437
 V. Provide the Simulation Time as how long you want the Emulation to be performed.
Make sure client system(s) are ready and then click Run Simulation.

During Simulation you will notice a change in the quality of the video being played in the
destination PC. This is because the network created in NetSim has errors / delays etc in the
links. The impact of this loss / jitter / delay etc in NetSim Emulator is seen on a real video
stream.

10.3.3.2 Steps at Source PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Running Emulation via GUISetting up the NetSim
Client. Then open VLC Media player Click Media menu Select Stream Option.
2. Click add button then select the video which you want to play

3. Click on Stream Option. Then click next button

4. Enable the display locally checkbox. Then select the RTP / MPEG Transport Stream from
the drop down list as shown in the below screen shot

438
5. Click on Add Button. Then enter the Destination IP address in the Address field and enter
a stream name (user defined) and click next button.

6. Select Video MPEG-2 + MPGA (TS) option from the drop down list as shown in the
below screen shot. Then click next button

439
7. Perform all the steps at Emulation Server and then click on Stream button. Also Wireshark
(if installed) will automatically start capturing the packets as soon as Emulation Server starts
simulation.

10.3.3.3 Steps at Destination PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Running Emulation via GUISetting up the

NetSim Client. After performing all the steps at Source PC and NetSim Emulation Server,
open VLC Media Player Click on Toggle Playlist icon as shown in the below screenshot.

440
 Toggle button is circled in red at the bottom of the screen shot

2. Double click on Network Stream (SAP) under local network. Then right click and play on
the stream name that appears on the screen.

3. In the streamed video, you will notice a change in the quality of the video being played in
the destination PC. Also Wireshark (if installed) will automatically start capturing the packets
as soon as Emulation Server starts simulation.

441
10.3.4 Example Application 3 File Transfer using FileZilla (One
way Communication)
10.3.4.1 Steps at Destination PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim

Client. Run FileZilla Server software. Create a group by going to Edit Groups
Select General under Page: Click Add in Groups Give Any Name (Ex:
Admin) and click ok.

2. Go to Edit User General Click Add in User Give Any Name (Ex: User1)
and Select Group what you given in Group Setting (In this case, we provide Admin
) and click ok.

3. In Account Setting, select Enable account and set password and click ok.

442
 4. Go to Shared folder Add Folder to share (EX: FTP_FILES from Desktop)
Select all the Files and Directories Permissions and set that folder as Home Directory
by selecting Set as Home Dir. Click Ok.

10.3.4.2 Steps at Source PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim

Client. Run FileZilla Client software.

2. Enter the Host Name(Server System ip (EX: 192.168.0.133)) and Give the User,
Password that we created in Server side and give Port No = 21. Run Emulation server
and click Quick Connect. Drag and drop files from Local Site to Remote Site.

10.3.4.3 Steps at NetSim Emulation Server:

1. Run NetSim in Administrative Mode and create a basic network Scenario in any stack
based protocol (Any network except Legacy Networks) in NetSim. A sample scenario
in Internetworks is performed as shown with link speed set to 1 Mbps.

2. Click and drop the Application. Right click Application select Properties.
3. In the Application Type select Emulation.

443
 4. Select Source and Destination ID according to the network scenario and change the
Source and Destination IP address according to the IP Address of the real system and
click accept.

5. Provide the Simulation Time as how long you want the Emulation to be performed.
Make sure client system(s) are ready and then click Run Simulation.

10.3.4.4 Results:

Transfer speed from client without emulation:

Transfer speed from client with emulation:

444
10.3.5 Example Application 4 Skype (Two way Communication)
10.3.5.1 Steps at NetSim Emulation Server:

1. Run NetSim in Administrative Mode and create a basic network Scenario in any stack
based protocol (Any network except Legacy Networks, Wireless Sensor Network,
Zigbee Network and Cellular Network) in NetSim. Screenshot of a sample scenario in
Internetworks is shown below.

2. Click and drop Application button. Right click Application select Properties. As it
is two way communication, add and create two applications.
3. In both the Application Type select Emulation.
4. In one Application, select Source ID and Destination ID according to the network
scenario and change the Source and Destination IP address according to the IP
Address of the real system. In the second application, set the opposite of first
application, i.e. Source ID and IP address will be exchanged with Destination ID and
IP address. (Refer the IP settings in the screen-shot to get a clear picture)

445
 5. Provide the Simulation Time as how long you want the Emulation to be performed.
Make sure client system(s) are ready and then click Run Simulation.

10.3.5.2 Steps at Source PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim Client.
2. Run Skype and make a call to the destination system (Make sure that Skype is running in
Destination PC).
3. Wireshark (if installed) will automatically start capturing the packets as soon as Emulation
Server starts simulation .

10.3.5.3 Steps at Destination PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim Client.
After performing all the steps at Source PC and NetSim Emulation Server, open Skype.
2. Wireshark (if installed) will automatically start capturing the packets as soon as Emulation
Server starts simulation.

446
10.3.6 Example Application 5 JPerf Network performance
measurement graphical tool (One way Communication)
10.3.6.1 Steps at NetSim Emulation Server:

1. Run NetSim in Administrative Mode and create a basic network Scenario in any stack
based protocol (Any network except Legacy Networks, Wireless Sensor Network,
Zigbee Network and Cellular Network) in NetSim. Screenshot of a sample scenario in
Internetworks is shown below

2. Click and drop the Application. Right click Application select Properties.
3. In the Application Type select Emulation.
4. Select Source and Destination ID according to the network scenario and change the
Source and Destination IP address according to the IP Address of the real system and
click accept.

447
 5. Provide the Simulation Time as how long you want the Emulation to be performed.
Make sure client system(s) are ready and then click Run Simulation.

10.3.6.2 Steps at Source PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim Client.
Run JPerf and select Client and set Server Address as 192.168.0.145. User can edit the
Application Layer options, Transport Layer options and IP Layer options depending on the
type of data they want to transmit in the network .

2. Do not click Run IPerf until all the steps at NetSim Emulation Server are done. Also
Wireshark (if installed) will automatically start capturing the packets as soon as Emulation
Server starts simulation .

448
10.3.6.3 Steps at Destination PC:

1. Follow steps as provided before in Emulation Set-up: Setting up the NetSim Client.
Run JPerf and select Server.

2. Click on Run IPerf after the Source PC starts running JPerf.

449
11 Troubleshooting in NetSim
11.1 CLI mode
While running NetSim via CLI for the scenarios described in the Configuration file, you may
bump into few problems.

Note: While running NetSim via CLI, try to ensure that there are no errors in the
Configuration.xml file. The file, ConfigLog.txt, written to the windows temp path would
show errors, if any, found by NetSims config parser.

This section discusses some common issues and solutions:

Possible errors when running NetSim via CLI

11.1.1 I/O warning displayed in CLI mode:

Reason: While typing the CLI command if you enter wrong I/O Path, or if there is no
Configuration.xml file then the following error is thrown

Solution: Please check the I/O path.

450
11.1.2 Connection refused at server<-111> error displayed:

Wrong License information

Reason: If the license information is wrong then the following message will be shown.

Solution: In this example, license server IP address is 192.168.0.185 but it is given as

192.168.0.180. Here server IP address is wrong.Same error message is shown for wrong port
number, wrong tag name likeapppath,-iopath,-license. For example, if appppath is typed
instead of apppath then this message will be shown. So, check those details.

11.1.3 Unable to load license config dll(126) problem:

Apppath and I/O path have white spaces

Solution: If the folder name contains white space, then mention the folder path within double
quotes while specifying the folder name in the command prompt. For example, if app path
contains white space, then the app path must be mentioned within double quotes in the
command prompt.

451
11.1.4 Error in getting License error in CLI mode:

Simulation does not commence. No license for product (-1) is displayed in the command
prompt.

Example:

452
Solution:

NetSim is based on the client-server architecture. When NetSim runs in the client machine, it
will check for the license in the same machine, first. If license is not available in the same
machine, then No license for product (-1) will be displayed in the command prompt and the
server machine will be checked for the availability of license. If no license is available in the
server machine also, then again No license for product (-1) will be displayed in the
command prompt.

So, if No license for product(-1) is displayed in the command prompt two times, then check
in the NetSim license server to know about the availability of license and adjust the number
of current users of NetSim, in order to get the license.

11.1.5 Unable to load license config dll displayed:

Reason: If the command/iopath provided by the user is first written in MS Word and then
copy pasted to Command prompt, some special characters(not visible in command prompt)
gets inserted and on execution, license config dll is not found.

Solution: Type the command manually or copy paste the command/iopath from notepad.

453
11.2 Configuration.xml
11.2.1 Blue zigzag lines in configuration file attributes:
Specific attributes in the Configuration file are highlighted with zigzag lines

Reason: If invalid input is given in the Configuration file, then the corresponding attribute is
highlighted in zigzag lines as shown in the figure given below.

Solution:

To resolve this issue mouse over the corresponding attribute, in order to get the tool tip that
furnishes the details about the valid input for that attribute.

Note: If the schema file and the configuration file are not present in the same folder, the
zigzag lines wont appear. So place the Configuration file and Schema File in the same
location or change the path of schema file in the configuration file.

11.2.2 Red zigzag lines in configuration file attributes:

Simulation does not commence and error is displayed at the command prompt. Also, Zigzag
lines appearing at the tag specifying the Layer in the Configuration file

Reason: This issue arises mainly when the closing tag is not specified correctly for a
particular layer in the Configuration file.

Example: If the closing tag is not specified for the Data link Layer, then the zigzag lines
appear at the starting tags of Data link Layer and the Network Layer.

454
When NetSim is made to run through CLI, then the following error gets displayed in the
command prompt.

Solution: The bug can be fixed by setting the closing tag correctly in the Configuration file

11.2.3 Zigzag lines appearing at configuration.xsd in the

Configuration file:

Zigzag lines appearing at configuration.xsd in the Configuration file

Reason: This issue arises when the schema and the configuration file are not in the same
folder.

455
Solution: The bug can be fixed by placing the Configuration file and schema in the same
folder.

11.2.4 Simulation terminates and NetSim Backend has stopped

working displayed:

Simulation terminates and exhibits unpredictable behavior. An error message stating, An

exe to run NetSim backend has stopped working is thrown

Example:

This problem arises if there is any flaw in the Configuration.xml or in the dll.

Solution: Check whether the desired scenario has been configured properly in the
Configuration.xml.

456
11.3 GUI
11.3.1 Readability problem of texts in window:

The text doesnt fit into the available space. This can be a problem of readability like in the
following case where MTU looks like MIU

Reason:

The system display setting has been change from Normal size (96DPI) to large size (120DPI)

Solution:

The display setting should change to normal size (96DPI) in DPI setting

In Windows XP, Right click in the desktop properties Settings (Tab) Advanced
(Button) DPI Setting (Combo box) Select normal size (96DPI).

Click OK button then must restart the system.

In case if the problem still persists,

In Windows XP, Right click in the desktop properties Appearance (Tab) Font size
(Combo box) Select Normal and Click OK button

11.3.2 Monitor screen resolution is less than 1024X768:

While starting NetSim, error shows the monitor screen resolution is less than 1024 X 768.

Reason: This error will come if monitor resolution is less than 1024 and 768. For example,
1260 X 720 will also show this error

Solution: Change your monitor resolution to 1024 X 768 or above.

457
11.4 Licensing
11.4.1 No License for product (-1) error

NetSim dongle is running in the server system. When running the NetSim in the Client
system showing No License for product (-1) error.

Possible Reasons

1. Firewall in the client system is blocking the Network traffic.

2. No network connection between Client and Server.
3. License Server is not running in the Server system.

Solution

1. The installed firewall may block traffic at 5053 port used for licensing. So either the
user can stop the firewall, or may configure it to allow port 5053.
2. Contact the Network-in-charge and check if the Server system can be pinged from
client.
3. Check whether License Server is running in the Server system or not.

458
11.5 Emulator
11.5.1 Server closing connection duration Emulation

Reason: This issue has been noticed rarely when emulation is running above one hour.

Solution:

1. Close and re-run Run_Emulation_Client.exe in NetSim client.

2. In the Emulation Server, close the error message(if any) and click Edit and re-run
the network scenario.

11.5.2 Emulation closed, yet clients are sending network packets

to NetSim Emulation Server IP Address.

If you send any data packet within your Network, it will get routed via Emulation Server.

As shown here, data transmitted to

192.168.0.147 is being routed via
192.168.0.145 which is nothing but
a former Emulation Server.

Reason: After closing the NetSim Emulation client, a new window will appear as shown
below and user closes it manually.

Solution: DO NOT CLOSE this window manually. It will automatically close after
sometime. In case the user manually closes the window, they need to disable the active
network adapter (located at Control Panel Network and Sharing Center Change adapter
settings) and enable it to revert back to the original network settings.

459
12 Known Issues in NetSim v9
12.1 User modified parameters in device properties will not
reflect in newly dropped devices
After dropping nodes on the environment, modification of protocols/ global properties (like
Physical Layer parameters, Data Link Layer parameters and others) in one node will reflect
in all other nodes. But after modification, if any new node is dropped, the modifications will
not be reflected in the newly dropped nodes

Solution: After dropping new nodes, open the properties of any old wireless node and click
accept.

12.2 Dynamic metrics not updated on modifying scenario

After designing a network scenario and enabling the Dynamic Metrics, if the user
modifies the scenario by adding new Links or Application and simulate, these new Link and
Application properties will not be plotted.

Solution: After making modification and just before simulating the scenario, Click on
Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

After opening a network scenario where Dynamic Metrics is enabled, if the user
modifies the scenario by adding new Links or Application and simulate, these new Link and
Application properties will not be plotted.

Solution: After making modification and just before simulating the scenario, Click on
Dynamic Metrics and click OK.

12.3 Packet animation in map view does not show node

mobility
In NetSim, if a network scenario is created in Map View and mobility is enabled in Nodes,
then packet animation will not display any node movement due to mobility, even in high
zoom.

460
12.4 Device properties does not revert to default values
User modifies the default values in a parameter, which is exclusive to a specific
protocol/codec, and then changes the protocol/codec using the provided combo box. If the
user reverts the combo box value again to the old protocol/codec, then the modified
parameter values will be shown instead of the default ones.

12.5 No special characters in file path for Firewall config file

While configuring the path for Firewall configuration file in NetSim router properties, users
cannot write the file path manually, as special characters like / and others are not allowed
as input.

Solution: Type the file path in a text file. Then copy the path and paste it in the input field.

12.6 Incumbent ID in network and metrics not matching

Users may face issue when checking Incumbent Metrics in Cognitive Radio network after
simulation as the Incumbent ID may not match the one displayed during network scenario
creation.

12.7 BGP link speed issues

In a BGP Scenario, if OSPF protocol is running and the link speed between Internal and BGP
routers is 100,000 mbps and the rest are set to default, then application throughput obtained is
zero.

12.8 Dynamic Metrics limit is 500 graphs

If Dynamic Metrics is enabled for a network scenario containing more than 500 links or
application, then all the graphs may not be displayed in the Performance Metrics Window.

Reason: This is because windows has a limit of 512 on the max number of files that can be
open simultaneously

461
12.9 Running Application between unconnected nodes
Users can create multiple isolated networks in NetSim. But if an application is set having
source as a node of an isolated network and destination as a node of another isolated network,
NetSim may crash or display zero application throughput.

12.10 RIP Hop count

As per RIP routing protocol, the maximum number of hops/routers it can work from one end
to another is 16. But in NetSim, RIP protocol can work across more than 16 routers.

12.11 Default gateway cant be empty

When user manually provides a value in a blank Default Gateway parameter in any device,
then it cannot be made blank again, which in turn may lead NetSim to crash.

Solution: Users should not enter any value in a blank default gateway field in UI.

12.12 Simulating ATM scenario multiple times will crash

NetSim
If user attempts to simulate ATM network multiple times using Go back to Network
option, then there is a possibility that NetSim will crash.

12.13 Packet size limit in TDMA(Military Radio)

High packet sizes will lead to zero throughputs.

where SLOT_DURATION is in millisecond and DATA_RATE = 25kbps

462
12.14 Removing link between switches leads to IP addressing
issue.
User connects 3 or more switches serially with a router on one side and wired node on the
other side. Due to this, the node is assigned default gateway value. But on removing an
intermediate link, the default gateway value still remains in the node properties, which may
lead to crashing of the network scenario.

12.15 Packet animation simulation time bar is not

functioning properly ion WSN, IOT.
During Packet animation of Wireless Sensor Network and Internet of Things, the simulation
time bar, when dragged to a longer time duration, automatically returns back to a lower value.

12.16 In IOT, Power model metrics results are zero.

After simulating an IOT network scenario, power model metrics result will display as zero.
This issue is expected to be solved in the upcoming v9.1 version.

12.17 Traditional Ethernet, Frame Relay and X.25 networks

crash
If user enables Packet Trace while simulating Traditional Ethernet, Frame Relay and X.25
network scenarios, NetSim will crash.

463
13 NetSim Videos
In order to have a better understanding of NetSim, users can access YouTube channel of
Tetcos at www.youtube.com/tetcos and check out the various videos available

464